150522640 2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping

Parameters Table Recommended value Default

Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900&DCS1800

Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked

Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3

MCC Cell_Common 470 None

MNC Cell_Common 02 None

NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0

BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0

Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1

Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated

PCU Cell_Common 255 255

GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS not support GPRS

Support Baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously Cell_Common Yes Yes

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No

8PSK power attenuation grade Cell_Common 0 0

Support NACC Cell_Common No No

Support PACKET SI STATUS Cell_Common No No

Support NC2 Cell_Common No No

PCU Support 64 Neighbor Cells Cell_Common No No

Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support

Cellband Cell_Common 0 0

RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan

Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support

Support Enhanced DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support

Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 1

FH MODE Cell_Common As per frequency plan As per frequency plan

DL DTX Cell_CommonNo (tunable based on

performance)Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Cell_Common 63 62

Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None

Enhanced Concentric Allowed Cell_Common No Yes

Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Normal cell

Attributes of UL And OL Subcells Cell_Common NONE NONE

BCCH Concentric Attribute Cell_Common None None

UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden Cell_Common Yes Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1

TCH Immediate Assignment Cell_Common No No

Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes

SDCCH Dynamic Allocation Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes

UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes

DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Cell_Common Yes Yes

Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Cell_Common Yes Yes

TRX Index TRx Depend on invidual site 65535

TRX No. TRx Depend on invidual site 255

Cell Index TRx Depend on invidual site None

Site Index TRx Depend on invidual site 65535

Board Type TRx Depend on invidual site None

Active State TRx Activated Activated

Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto

Cabinet No. TRx Depend on invidual site 0

Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site 0

Slot No. TRx Depend on invidual site None

TEI TRx Depend on invidual site 0

Out-BSC Subrack No. TRx Depend on invidual site 0

Out-BSC Slot No. TRx Depend on invidual site None

Out-BSC Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site None

Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site 255

RSL In Site Port No. TRx Depend on invidual site 255

RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K) TRx Depend on invidual site 255

RSL Logic No. TRx Depend on invidual site 2048

Hop Type TRx As per frequency plan None

Power Level TRx 0 0

Power Type TRxDepends on BTS/site

configurationDefault

HW_Concentric Attribute TRxDepends on BTS/site

configurationNone

TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0

Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable

TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes No

TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0

Wireless Link Alarm Flag TRx No No

Abnormal Release Statistic Base TRx 100 100

Abnormal Warn Threshold TRx 100 100

Abnormal Release Threshold TRx 50 50

Statical Period of No-traffic(5min) TRx 48 48

Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit TRx Yes Yes

WLA Prompting Recover Period(5min) TRx 12 12

Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 8 8

End Time of WLA Detection(hour) TRx 22 22

Up Down Balance Basic Difference TRx 8 8

Up Down Balance Floating Range TRx 30 30

Up Down Balance Alarm Threshold TRx 80 80

Receive Mode TRxDepends on BTS/site

configurationNone

Send Mode TRxDepends on BTS/site

configurationNone

Allow Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier TRx Yes No

Antenna Hopping Index TRx No No

Power Finetune TRx Default Default

TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None

Reverse Out-BSC Slot No. TRx 255 255

Reverse Out-BSC Port No. TRx 255 255

Reverse Out-BSC Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255

Reverse RSL In Site Port No. TRx 255 255

Reverse RSL In Site Timeslot No.(8K) TRx 255 255

Transmission Type of Abis Interface TRx TDM TDM

Maximum PDCH numbers of carrier TRx 8 8

MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32

Co-TRX for Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) TRx 255 255

InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535

HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535

TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255

XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0

TRX Ability TRx 1

PhysicalPassNo TRx 1

Priority TRx NONE

QTRU Priority TRx 255

RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535

Time Slot Power Rerserve TRx 0 0

Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX Power Amplifier Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) Basic_Parameter 63 62

DL DTX Basic_ParameterNo (tunable based on

performance)Yes

Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 00000001 1

DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

TCH Immediate Assignment Basic_Parameter No No

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 8

Call Reestablishment Forbidden Basic_Parameter Yes Yes

UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use

GSM900 Band Traffic Load Share Threshold CH_MGT 25 25

Channel Assignment Allowed for Insufficient Power CH_MGT No Yes

Qtru Down Link Path Loss Compensation CH_MGT 4 4

Qtru Estimate Bts Power CH_MGT 35 35

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Last Time CH_MGT 3 3

Qtru Down Power Inadequate Stat Time CH_MGT 5 5

Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None

Observed time of uplink received level difference CH_MGT 5 5

Duration of uplink received level difference CH_MGT 4 4

Smooth factor of uplink received level CH_MGT 6 6

Threshold of the difference between uplink received

levelsCH_MGT 100 100

Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid

Subcell LoadCH_MGT Yes Yes

Tch Traffic Busy Underlay Threshold CH_MGT 50 50

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in Overlaid Subcell CH_MGT 30 50

Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close

Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close

Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Threshold(%) CH_MGT 80 80

Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Threshold(%) CH_MGT 80 80

TCH req suspend interval(s) CH_MGT 60 60

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold CH_MGT 2 40

AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed CH_MGT Yes As per plan

Update Freq.of CH Record CH_MGT 2 2

Update Period of CH Record(min) CH_MGT 30 30

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. CH_MGT 2 2

Filter Length for SDCCH Level CH_MGT 2 As per frequency plan

Filter Length for TCH Qual. CH_MGT 6 6

Filter Length for TCH Level CH_MGT 6 4

Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold CH_MGT 50 40

Interf.of DL Level Threshold CH_MGT 25 25

Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold CH_MGT 50 40

Interf.of UL Level Threshold CH_MGT 30 10

History Record Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes

Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes

Interf. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) CH_MGT 50 50

TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No

Dynamic Transmission Diversity(PBT) Supported CH_MGT Not Support Not Support

Channel Allocate Strategy CH_MGT Capability preferred Capability preferred

Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes

TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) CH_MGT 60 60

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum CH_MGT 80 80

Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 CH_MGT 2 2

AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(H) Call_Control 3 15



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(H) Call_Control 26 63



AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 15 1101

AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 3



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 30

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 22

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 As per plan

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst3(F) Call_Control 3 1



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th3(F) Call_Control 26 As per frequency plan

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th2(F) Call_Control 18 18

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) Call_Control 12 12

AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 165 11100100

Max Assignment Retry Times Call_Control 2 1

Frequency Band of Reassign Call_Control Tunable Different Band

Short Message Downlink Disabled Call_Control No No

Immediate Assignment Opt. Call_Control No No

Abis Resource Adjustment TCHH Function Switch Call_Control No No

Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No

Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes

Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1

Power Deviation Indication Call_Control Yes Yes

MBR Call_Control0(for normal cell); 2(near to

Dualband cell)0

ECSC Call_Control Yes NO

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52

Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No

Special Access Control Class Call_Control Not selected 00000

Common Access Control Class Call_Control Not selected 0000000000

MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 4 Times

Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass Call_Control 2 2

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) Call_Control 4 4

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter Call_Control No No

N200 of FACCH/Full rate Call_Control 34 34

N200 of FACCH/Half rate Call_Control 29 29

N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23

N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5

N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5

N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5

Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No

T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) Call_Control 60 60

T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) Call_Control 60 60

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) Call_Control 200 200

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) Call_Control 150 150

T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50

T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50

T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60

RACH Min.Access Level(dbm) Call_Control -115 -115

Random Access Error Threshold Call_Control 200 180

TRX Aiding Function Control Call_ControlAllowed & Recover When Check

Res.

TRX Aiding Not

Allowed

Speech Version Call_Control 47 11

AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 52

AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 64

AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 32

AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 48

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold Call_Control 75 85

Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable Call_Control Disable Disable

Paging Times Call_Control 1 4

RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) Call_Control 24 31

T3105(10ms) HO 7 7

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. HO 30 30

Inner Cell Serious OverLoad Threshold(%) HO 90 90

Number of Satisfactory Measurements(s) HO As per plan As per plan

Total Number of Measurements(s) HO 5 5

Inter UL And OL Subcells HO Penalty Time(s) HO 5 5

Outgoing OL Subcell HO level Threshold(dB) HO 25 25

Incoming OL Subcell HO level Threshold(dB) HO As per frequency plan As per frequency plan

Step Length of OL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO Yes 5

OL Subcell Load Diversity HO Period(s) HO 10 10

Load HO of OL Subcell to UL Subcell Enabled HO No No

Modified Step Length of UL Load HO Period(s) HO 1 1

Step Length of UL Subcell Load HO(dB) HO 5 5

UL Subcell Load Hierarchical HO Period(s) HO 5 5

Distance Hysteresis Between Boundaries of UL And OL

Subcells(dB)HO 2 2

Distance Between Boundaries of UL And OL

Subcells(dB)HO 10 10

Allowed Flow Control Level of UL And OL Subcell HO HO 10 10

UL Subcell Serious Overload Threshold(%) HO 90 90

UL Subcell General Overload Threshold(%) HO 80 80

Assignment Optimization of OL Subcell Allowed Or Not HO No No

Assignment Optimization of UL Subcell Allowed Or Not HO Yes Yes

UL Subcell Lower Load Threshold(%) HO 50 50

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed HO No No

Ps UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35

Ps OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 25 25

ReceiveQualThrshAMRHR HO 60 60

ReceiveQualThrshAMRFR HO 65 65

En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Step HO 5 5

En Iuo In Cell Load Classification HO Period HO 5 5

En Iuo Out Cell Serious OverLoad Threshold HO 90 90

En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold HO 85 85

En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold HO 30 20

MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail HO 3 3

Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) HO 5 10

Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) HO 30 40

Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) HO 5 10

Underlay HO Step Level HO 5 5

Underlay HO Step Period(s) HO 5 5

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold HO 35 35

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold HO 20 25

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum Layer HO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC HO System Optimization System Optimization

TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. HO 0 0

TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed HO No No

TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. HO 63 63

Assign-optimum-level Threshold HO 35 35

Assign Optimum Layer HO System Optimization System Optimization

UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4

UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5

TA Hysteresis HO 0 0

TA Threshold HO 62 63

RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 60

RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5

RX_LEV Threshold HO 40 35

UO Signal Intensity Difference HO 0 0

TA for UO HO Allowed HO NO Yes

RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed HO Yes No

RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 80 80

RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO HO 4 3

K Bias HO 0 0

UL Expected Level at HO Access HO 35 30

Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) HO 40 40

Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO HO 30 30

Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. HO 6 6

Forbidden time after MAX Times HO 20 20

MAX Consecutive HO Times HO 3 3

MS Fast-moving Time Threshold HO 15 15

MS Fast-moving Valid Cells HO NA 2

MS Fast-moving Watch Cells HO 3 3

Load HO Step Level HO 5 5

Load HO Step Period HO 10 10

Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25

Load Req.on Candidate Cell HO 75 75

Load HO Threshold HO 85 85

System Flux Threshold for Load HO HO 10 10

ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 65

RXLEVOff HO 5 5

RXQUAL12 HO 50 50

RXQUAL11 HO 51 51

RXQUAL10 HO 52 52

RXQUAL9 HO 53 53

RXQUAL8 HO 54 54

RXQUAL7 HO 55 55

RXQUAL6 HO 56 56

RXQUAL5 HO 57 57

RXQUAL4 HO 58 58

RXQUAL3 HO 59 59

RXQUAL2 HO 60 60

RXQUAL1 HO 70 70

Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit HO 8 8

No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit HO 60 60

No Dl Mr.HO Allowed HO Yes No

Filter Parameter B HO 0 0

Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10








UL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60

DL Qual. Threshold HO 50 60

Emergency HO TA Threshold HO 255 255

DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open

CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255

UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10

RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5

Filter Length for TCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK HO 6 6

Filter Length for SDCCH NBR_RCVD_BLOCK HO 2 2

Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s) HO 30 30

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT HO 6 6

Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT HO 2 2

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP HO 6 6

Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP HO 2 2

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP HO 6 6

Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP HO 2 2

Penalty Time after TA HO(s) HO 10 30

Penalty Level after TA HO HO 63 63

Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) HO 15 15

Penalty Level after BQ HO HO 30 63

Penalty Level after HO Fail HO 30 30

Filter Length for TA HO 6 4

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV HO 6 4

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual HO 3 2

Filter Length for SDCCH Level HO 2 2

Filter Length for TCH Qual HO 6 4

Filter Length for TCH Level HO 6 4

Allowed M.R Number Lost HO 4 4

Min Power Level For Direct Try HO 25 16

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR HO Once Every Second Twice every second

Transfer BS/MS Power Class HO Yes Yes

Transfer Original MR HO No No

MR.Preprocessing HO Yes No

MS Power Prediction after HO HO No No

Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes

Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed HO No No

Min Interval for Emerg.HOs HO 2 4

Min Interval for Consecutive HOs HO 6 4

Min Interval for SDCCH HOs HO 2 2

Min Interval for TCH HOs HO 4 2

ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open

TIGHT BCCH HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2

TIGHT BCCH HO Watch Time(s) HO 3 3

Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO

H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10

F2H HO Threshold HO 30 25

Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) HO 4 4

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) HO 5 5

Intracell F-H HO Allowed HO Yes YES

Min DL Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 15 15

Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell HO 10 10

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis HO 3 3

Inter-layer HO Threshold HO 25 25

Inter-System Handover Enable HO No No

PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 4 2

PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 5 3

Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 2

Layer HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 3

Edge HO AdjCell Valid Time(s) HO 2 2

Edge HO AdjCell Watch Time(s) HO 3 3

Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 2

Edge HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 3

Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold HO 20 20

Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold HO 15 10

Interference HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

Concentric Circles HO Allowed HO Yes (for MB cell), No for othres Yes

TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

Level HO Allowed HO No Yes

PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed HO No No

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed HO No No

Load HO Allowed HO Yes No

Intracell HO Allowed HO Yes No

SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No

Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO No Yes

PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0

TO Idle_Mode 0 0

ACS Idle_Mode No No

CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode 0 No

PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes

CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB

Period of Periodic Location Update(6 minutes) Idle_Mode 60(should same for same LAC) 20

BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode 4 Multiframe Period 2 Multiframe Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 1 2

NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 255 11111111

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode 0 No

Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a TDMA

frame,4.615ms))Idle_Mode 20 32

ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes

Timer for UL Data Forward(ms) Other_Properties 10 10

WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000

WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000

T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000

T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10

TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000

T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000






T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000

ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) Other_Properties 5000 5000


Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable Other_Properties No No

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable Other_Properties No No

Base Hop Support Close TRX Allowed Other_Properties No No

Qtru Signal Merge Switch Other_Properties No No

MAX Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Other_Properties 220 220

Average Paging Message Number 0f Cell In Period Other_Properties 180 180

Paging Numbers of one Optimizing Msgs Other_Properties 5 5

Interval For Sending Paging Optimizing Msgs Other_Properties 2 2

Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on

Interfere Band Stat Algorithm Type Other_PropertiesInterference Band

Measurement Algorithm II

Interference Band

Measurement

Algorithm II

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch Other_Properties Yes Yes

Lower-level sublink resources preemption switch Other_Properties No No

Sublink resources preemption switch Other_Properties No No

Force MS to Send Ho Access SWITCH Other_Properties Yes Yes

IntraCellHo to Ass SWITCH Other_Properties No No

Frequency Scan Result Type Other_Properties Maximum/Mean Value Maximum/Mean Value

Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover Timeout Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell Handover Timeout Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover Timeout Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover Timeout Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Resource Check Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Forced Handover Failure Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Equipment Failure Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link Failure Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Release Indication Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (other) Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio resource not

available)Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM intervention) Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO access fail) Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (radio link fail) Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Error Indication (sequence error) Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Error Indication (unsolicited DM

response)Other_Properties 1 1

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200 timeout) Other_Properties 1 1

Directly Magnifier Site Flag Other_Properties No No

Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) Other_Properties 15 15

Abis Flow Control Permitted Other_Properties Yes Yes

Support Half Rate Other_Properties Yes No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties 5(900), 0(1800) 5

PWRC Other_Properties Yes Yes

ActGene Other_Properties 5 5

PS LowPri ServicePRI Other_Properties 6 6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI Other_Properties 4 4

CS Data ServicePRI Other_Properties 5 5

CS Voice ServicePRI Other_Properties 3 3

Included Angle(Degree) Other_Properties 360 360

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) Other_Properties 360 360

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number Other_Properties 5000 5000

Overload Indication Period Other_Properties 15 15

CCCH Load Threshold Other_Properties 80 80

CCCH Load Indication Period(s) Other_Properties 15 15

Radio Resource Report Period(s) Other_Properties 10 10

Frequency Adjust Value Other_Properties 36671 36671

Frequency Adjust Switch Other_Properties NO NO

VSWR TRX Error Threshold Other_Properties 2 2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold Other_Properties 2 2

Power Output Reduction Threshold Other_Properties 2 2

Power Output Error Threshold Other_Properties 2 2

DC Bias Voltage Threshold Other_Properties 3 3

Frame Start Time Other_Properties 65535 65535

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) Other_Properties 0 5

Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH period(480ms)) Other_Properties 20 20

Interf. Band Threshold 5 (-dBm) Other_Properties 85 85






Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold Other_Properties 0 50

SMCBC DRX Other_Properties Yes Yes

Data service Allowed Other_Properties 118 118

Power boost before HO enabled or not Other_Properties StartUp not StartUp

Voice quality report switch Other_Properties report not report

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted Other_Properties 0 Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop Gain 8(dB) Power_Control 53 53








HwIII UL MAX UpStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8

HwIII UL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12

HwIII UL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12

HwIII UL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII UL HS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22

HwIII UL RexLev Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 20

HwIII UL RexLev Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 30

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6

HwIII UL RexLev Adjust Factor Power_Control 4 4

HwIII UL Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1

HwIII UL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1

HwIII UL Rex Qual.Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3

HwIII UL RexLev Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3

HwIII DL MAX UpStep (dB) Power_Control 8 8

HwIII DL MAX DownStep(dB) Power_Control 8 8

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 12 12

HwIII DL AFS Rex Qual.Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII DL HS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Lower Threshold(dB) Power_Control 16 16

HwIII DL FS Rex Qual. Upper Threshold(dB) Power_Control 22 22

HwIII DL RexLev Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 25

HwIII DL RexLev Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 35

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6

HwIII DL RexLev Adjust Factor Power_Control 6 6

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Slide Window Power_Control 1 1

HwIII DL RexLev Slide Window Power_Control 1 1

HwIII DL Rex Qual. Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3

HwIII DL RexLev Exponent Filter Length Power_Control 3 3

HwIII Traffic Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 3 3

HwIII Signal Channel Discard MR Number Power_Control 1 1

HwIII Down Link Power Control Adjust Period Power_Control 3 3

HwIII Up Link Power Control Adjust Period Power_Control 3 3

HwIII Number of lost MRs allowed Power_Control 5 5

AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16

AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0

AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5

AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 8 8

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16

AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 6 4

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone 2 Power_Control 2 4



AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3

AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1

AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25

AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35

AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3

AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1

AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0

AMR MR. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. Power_Control 4 6

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual Power_Control 4 6

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 6

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 6

AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3

BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0

DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5

UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 10 0

UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold Power_Control 5 5

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 8 8

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV Power_Control 16 16

MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. Power_Control 6 4

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 2 Power_Control 2 4



DL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0

UL MR. Number Predicted Power_Control 1 0

MR. Compensation Allowed Power_Control Yes Yes

Filter Length for DL Qual. Power_Control 5 5

Filter Length for UL Qual. Power_Control 4 5

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV Power_Control 5 5

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV Power_Control 4 5

Power Control Algorithm Switch Power_Control HWII Power Control HW-II Power Control

DL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3

DL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 20 25

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 30 35

UL Qual. Lower Threshold Power_Control 4 3

UL Qual. Upper Threshold Power_Control 0 1

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold Power_Control 25 20

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold Power_Control 35 30

PC Interval Power_Control 3 3

Constant of Filtering the Collision Signal Strength for

Power ControlData_In_PCU 2 2

Measured Receive Power Level Channel Data_In_PCU pdch pdch

BTS Power Attenuation on PBCCH Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB

Signal Strength Filter Period in Transfer Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10

Signal Strength Filter Period in Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 10 10

Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14

Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1

Maximum Value of N3105 Data_In_PCU 10 10



Release Delay of Downlink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2400 2400

Inactive Period of Extended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 2000 2000

Release Delay of Non-extended Uplink TBF(ms) Data_In_PCU 120 120

Load Reselect Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 40 40

GPRS Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 5 5

EDGE 8PSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 16 16

EDGE GMSK Quality Threshold Data_In_PCU 7 7

Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2

Normal Cell Reselection Worsen Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 1 1

Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period Data_In_PCU 10 10

Cell Normal Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit

Cell Load Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit

Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed Data_In_PCU Permit Permit

2G/3G Cell Reselection Strategy Data_In_PCU Preference for 2G Cell Preference for 2G Cell

Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6

Allowed Measure Report Missed Number Data_In_PCU 4 4

Load Reselection Receive Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 60 60

Load Reselection Start Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 85 85

MS Rx Quality Worsen Ratio Threshold(%) Data_In_PCU 30 30

MS Rx Quality Statistic Threshold Data_In_PCU 200 200

Cell Penalty Last Time(s) Data_In_PCU 10 10

Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30

Cell Reselection Hysterisis Data_In_PCU 6 6

Min Access Level Threshold Data_In_PCU 15 15

Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support

PS Concentric Cell HO Strategy Data_In_PCUNo handover between underlaid

subcell and overlaid subcell

No handover between

underlaid subcell and

overlaid subcell

Transmission Delay of POC Service Data_In_PCU 650 650

Max. GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 16 16

Min. GBR for POC Service Data_In_PCU 6 6

Move Packet Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support

Move Immediate Assignment Down to BTS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support

Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support

Downlink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6

Downlink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED

Uplink Default MCS Type Data_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2

Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED

BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5

Link Quality Control Mode Data_In_PCU LA LA

Down TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5






Downlink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS2 CS2

Downlink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED

Up TBF threshold From CS4 to CS3 Data_In_PCU 5 5






Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1

Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED

Background Service Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 5 5

THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1



ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1



Timer of Releasing Abis Timeslot Data_In_PCU 15 15

Reservation Threshold of Dynamic Channel Conversion Data_In_PCU 2 2

Level of Preempting Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCUAll dynamic channels can be

preempted.

All dynamic channels

can be preempted.

Timer of Releasing Idle Dynamic Channel Data_In_PCU 20 20

Dynamic Channel Conversion Parameter of Concentric

CellData_In_PCU

only convert dynamic channel at

UL

only convert dynamic

channel at UL

PDCH Downlink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 80 80

PDCH Uplink Multiplex Threshold Data_In_PCU 70 70

Downlink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel

ConversionData_In_PCU 20 20

Uplink Multiplex Threshold of Dynamic Channel

ConversionData_In_PCU 20 20

Maximum Ratio Threshold of PDCHs in a Cell Data_In_PCU 30 30

MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCUReport the frequencies of six

strongest cells

Report the frequencies

of six strongest cells

Threshold of HCS Signal Strength Data_In_PCU -110dB -110dB

Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2

Maximum TX Power for Access PCH Data_In_PCU 2 2

Minimum Receiving level for Access Data_In_PCU 2 2

Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive

Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCU Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access

Accessorial Hysteresis of Cell Selection In New Routing

AreaData_In_PCU 2dB 2dB

Cell Reselection Forbidden Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec

Allow MS to Access to another Cell Data_In_PCU Yes Yes

Exceptional Rule for GPRS Reselect Offset Data_In_PCU 0 0

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Applied to C31 Criterion

or notData_In_PCU c31standard c31standard

GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB

Support PSI Status Message Data_In_PCU No No

Allow MR Command or not Data_In_PCU No No

PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6

Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16




Extension Transmission Timeslots of Random Access Data_In_PCU 20 20

Minimum Timeslots between Two Successive Channel

RequestsData_In_PCU 20 20

Maximum Retransmissions for Radio Priority 4 Data_In_PCU 7 7




Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0

PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1

PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4

PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Transfer Mode Data_In_PCU 0.96sec 0.96sec

Cell Reselection MR Period in Packet Idle Mode Data_In_PCU 15.36sec 15.36sec

Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.24sec

GPRS Reselection Offset Data_In_PCU -2dB -2dB

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec

GPRS Temporary Offset Data_In_PCU 10dB 10dB

Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec

Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1

Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1

NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1

Extension Measurement Command Data_In_PCU em0 em0

BSS Paging Coordination Data_In_PCU Yes Yes

Support 11BIT EGPRS Access Data_In_PCU Yes Yes

Routing Area Color Code Data_In_PCU 1 1

Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCU Packet access of level 4 Packet access of level 4

Support SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on CCCH Data_In_PCU No No

Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0

Pan Max. Data_In_PCU 12 12

Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4

Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2

BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10

Control Acknowledge Type Data_In_PCU Four access pulses by defaultFour access pulses by

default

Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit

Max. Duration of DRX(s) Data_In_PCU 4s 4s

T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms

T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms

Network Operation Mode Data_In_PCU Network Operation Mode IINetwork Operation

Mode II

Description

This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by Huawei

has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively.

The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China is

460.

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC).

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom operator.

The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique nationwide.

The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with the

same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the same

layer have the same priority.

For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.

This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not

Activated or Activated.

This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the Pb

interface.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a cell.

The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU) must be

configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE simultaneously.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with GSM,

EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM evolution

(EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which improv

This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by an

EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2 dB.

The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits

This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change (NACC)

function.

In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission mode,

the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.

When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status message

to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC sends th

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2) function.

In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells to the

BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a

This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.

In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report the

number of neighbor cells.

For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid and

cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be reported. For

other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually modif

This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated

frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot be

changed.

GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.

DCS1800: The cell

This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state

performs location management based on the routing area.

Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.

For example, value 0 indic

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM) function.

The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS service at the

same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function. Compared

with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup and release. When

the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.

This parameter specifies the encryption algorithm supported on the BSS side.

The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the

most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A

This parameter specifies whether the TRX adopts FH and specifies the FH mode used.

If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where

the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

This parameter specifies whether to enable the DTX function in a cell.

This parameter specifies the actual coverage area of a cell.

After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines

whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA

and the value

This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to implement

the extended cell.

A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.

Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120

This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.

In a GSM cell, the frequency, frame number, system information, and paging group are

transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or t

This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a

concentric cell.

If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of the MS

with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO

This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.

TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses form a

concentric cell.

Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL

This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This parameter is

applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the UL

subcell.

In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of

the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell.

In

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission

(DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall

buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this

case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details.

see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an

initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when

receiving an initial access request.

This parameter specifies whether to allow directed retry. In directed retry, a handover

procedure is performed to hand over the MS to a neighbor cell.

Directed retry is an emergency measure for abnormal peak traffic in the local wireless

network. It is n

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.

When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may fail to

access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs (includi

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power amplifier

of a TRX based on the traffic volume.

This parameter specifies whether to select different working voltages for the TRX power

amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC.

This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.

The following two points should be paid attention to:

1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies the

TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX numbers

may be discontinuous.

2. If the logical TRX is separated from the physical board, one-to-one mapping between them

is not mandatory.

Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of this

parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.

Internal 2G cells: 0-2047

External 2G cells: 2048-5047


This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a BSC.

This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS.

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.

The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot of OML

automatically.

This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet.

This parameter specifies the number of a subrack.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located.

This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.

This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when the

LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.

This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is located.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in the TC

subrack, which is connected to the local subrack.

This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the semi-

permanent link.

When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical

interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to 31.

When the semi-permanent link is configured on the optical interface board, each optical


This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port over the

Abis interface.

The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for

synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.

The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3 specifies the

first to the fourth 8 kbit/s sub-timeslot of the first 64 kbit/s timeslot. Accordingly, the timeslot

numbering is likewise.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port

occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot

occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL

link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links share one

number.

Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.


If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell where

the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can realize average interference and frequency

diversity.

This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater this parameter is,

the smaller the transmit power is.

When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest. Each time

this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB.

For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.

BTS3X: 0-10

BTS3001C: 0-13

BTS3002C: 0-10

Double-transceiver BTSs (BTS3012，BTS3012AE，BTS3006C): 0-10

DBS3900 GSM, BTS3900 GSM, BTS3900A GSM：0-10

This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the mini

BTS support different power levels.

This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this parameter

is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is not a concentric

one, this parameter is set to None by default.

This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment

algorithm.

This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX automatically for

saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external power supply is cut off.

This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate channels, or

convert the half rate channels to full rate channels.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No, the

conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be forcedly

restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly restored.

This parameter also specifies whether the channel supports the dynamic adjustment priority

in the channel assignment algorithm. In the channel assignment, the channels on the TRX not

supporting the dynamic adjustment are assigned first, to ensure the channels on the TRX

supporting the dynamic adjustment are used for dynamic adjustment. Thus, the access

requests of users are satisfied.

This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. There are 50 levels,

and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB.

The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK signals.

Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the BTS.

If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise, the

wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.

This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a sub-

channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N (the

number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a timeslot that are

activated).

For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released channels

exceeds Abnormal Warn Threshold, an alarm is generated.

If the percentage of abnormally released channels is less than or equal to Abnormal Release

Threshold, the BSC sends the corresponding recovery alarm.

If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel

activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.

If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel activation is

less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.

If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the no-

traffic alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless link

prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover Period.

If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the

corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not cleared

in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or not sent

according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each

day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the wireless link

alarm, and sends an alarm related.

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in each

day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops detecting the

wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts again until the next

Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour).

This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level difference

between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up Down Balance

Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink and downlink

unbalance.

Assume that Up Down Balance Basic Difference is set to 8 and Up Down Balance Alarm

Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power control

compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not

balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced.

This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range relative

to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not balanced only when the

uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range.


Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power control

compensation is greater than 8+30 or less than 8-30, the uplink and the downlink are not

balanced; otherwise, the uplink and downlink are balanced.

When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the total

valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, the uplink

and downlink unbalance alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.

The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four

Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity.

The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main

Diversity.

The DBS3900 GSM and BTS3900 GSM support Four Diversity Receiver and Main Diversity.

This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX.

The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Wide

Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter Independent or

Combining.

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and

DPBT.

The DBS3900 GSM GRRU supports No Combining, Diversity Transmitter and DDIVERSITY.

The BTS3900 GSM and BTS3900A GSM support No Combining, Power Booster Technology,

Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.

The BTS3012 supports No Combining, Power Booster Technology, Power Booster Technology,

Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY and DPBT.

The BTSs not included above do not support the RF tranmsit modes listed above.



This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the

signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX corresponding

to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less affected by Rayleigh

fading compared with those without antenna hopping. The Antenna Hopping Index

corresponds to a TRX number.

This parameter specifies the following: Currently, when the BSC performs the static power

control on the TRX, the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2 dB. In some

scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different tributaries, and the output

power difference before and after the combination is not an integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus,

the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be adjusted in the step of 2 dB, so the TRX

output power may be different from the cabinet top output power of the BTS.

Therefore, through the setting of this parameter, a finer step can be provided for adjusting

the cabinet top output power of the BTS.

This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping.


transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position or the

antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty, then the MS cannot receive the broadcast control

messages from the main BCCH TRX properly.

The antenna hopping function enables the data on all the timeslots of the BCCH TRX to be

transmitted on the antennas of all the TRXs in the cell in turn. Thus the quality of the BCCH

TRX data received by the MS is improved and the network performance is enhanced. Only the

double-transceiver BTS can be configured with the antenna hopping function.

This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board is

located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that holds

the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC.

This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must be

set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board.

This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board is

located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on the

interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC.

When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each electrical


When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the optical interface board, each optical


If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL

timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port

occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the timeslot

occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface.

This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2-

HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs on a

TRX.

This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the

current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no TRX

supports the PBT together with the current TRX.

This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel

connects to the BTS TMU.

This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU.

This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC

transmission mode.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL

signaling) is located.

This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.

This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring network.

This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output power

of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power.


amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.




After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS determines

whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by comparing the TA

and the value of this parameter.



The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit to the

most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4, A5/5, A5/6,

and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer that the BSS

supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer that the BSS does

not support the corresponding encryption algorithm.

The eights bits cannot be all zeros and the least significant bit must be 1.

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed..

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed.




network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is

preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the BTS

and the network layout.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving an

initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH when

receiving an initial access request.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For details.

see GSM Rec. 05.08.


This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by tall

buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may drop. In this

case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the call. The number of

call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful or if the subscriber hooks

on.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous Transmission

(DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple sub

frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of P-GSM/E-

GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to this threshold.

The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-GSM frequency bands

if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC preferentially assigns channels on

the R-GSM TRXs if the MS supports P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands and the cell is

configured with TRXs operating on the P-GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands.

This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU:

When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing

algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required power

of cell,

If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not allowed

to assign the channel.

The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink path loss

is estimated by the uplink path loss.

This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power sharing

algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of this parameter

ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is

insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is

insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

This parameter specifies the following definitions:

1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.

2. Static power sharing algorithm.

3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm.

The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing algorithm

is that the dynamic power sharing algorithm uses the MCPA power sharing technology, the

static power specification is different from dynamic power specification. When there are

several carriers, the maximum output power of single carrier in dynamic power specification

is greater.

In the network swapping, the static/dynamic power on the top of cabinet needs to compare

with the competitor power on the top of cabinet. If the static power on the top of cabinet ≥

competitor power on the top of cabinet, the static power sharing algorithm is used; if the

dynamic power on the top of cabinet ≥ competitor power on the top of cabinet ≥ static power

on the top of cabinet, the dynamic power sharing algorithm is used.

If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of

the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the

observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal

strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.

If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold of

the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During the

observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest uplink signal

strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.

The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously

multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values.

This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC monitors the high-

level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second.

If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of this

timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be

recorded.

During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is

initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls

should be handed over to another timeslot.

P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the Duration

of uplink received level difference.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and full-

rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid subcell and

overlaid subcell.

The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel

seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-rate channels

are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.

Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF

+ Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the

Allow Rate Selection Based on Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH Traffic

Busy Threshold (%) is invalid for the concentric cell.

The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the channel

seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-rate channels

are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.

Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available TCHF

+ Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.

This parameter is valid for the concentric cell. When the Allow Rate Selection Based on

Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell Load is set to Yes, the TCH Traffic Busy Threshold (%) is invalid for

the concentric cell.

This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used.

When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, this

parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can be

reduced.

Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.

This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.

In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel interference

among channels occur.

When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell, the

inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.

In the case of aggressive frequency reuse, the recommended value is set to Yes.

This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis

resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate channel is

preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is preferred according to

the dynamic Abis resource load.

When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%)

and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%),

the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is preferred.

This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the TCH,

this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The parameter

is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU.

The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are allowed by

the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell.

During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the

following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC,

the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is

greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHF or

TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required.

For details about cell load levels, refer to the Cell Load Threshold.

Relevant algorithm: AMR call channel assignment algorithms

This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of the

channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC.

During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in the

following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by the MSC,

the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell is

greater than the value of AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold. In other cases, the TCHF or

TCCH, TCHF Prior channels are required.

The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times out.

Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to improve

the priority of the channel.

Principles of taking values are as follows:

Generally, set this parameter to 2.

If a fixed interference source exists or an equipment fault occurs, the update frequency for

the affected cells can be set to 4 or 6.

The Update Period of CH Record is used together with Update Freq of CH Record, In this way,

the channel can be assigned even if the channel priority is continuously lowered within a

period of time.

When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the history record of

channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority of each channel is reduced by

Update Freq.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this parameter to increase the

channel priority.


Generally, a high-frequency adjustment is used. For example, the update period should be

set in such a way that it ranges from half an hour to one hour because several busy hours are

the major concerns during the actual operation in a day. If the parameter is set to a too small

value, the result of the history record is meaningless. If the parameter is set to a too great

value, the result cannot be seen in time during busy hours.

If a fixed interference source exists or an equipment fault occurs, the update period for the

affected cells can be set in such a way that it ranges from several hours to one day.

This parameter is used together with Update Freq. of CH Record so that the channel can be

assigned even if the history record priority decreases.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to determine the

signal quality on signaling channels.

The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one

measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the

average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of signaling

channels, and then determine the signal quality on signaling channels.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal

strength on the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate the

signal quality on speech/data TCHs.

The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement result.

To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average value of signal

quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then determine the signal

quality on speech/data TCHs.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the

speech/data TCH signal strength.

This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink

interference is existed.

The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the

signal quality is.

If the downlink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of DL level

Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of

DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs.

This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink


The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower the

signal quality is.


Threshold and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of

DL Qual Threshold. The downlink interference occurs.

The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference

is existed.

The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is.

If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold

and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual

Threshold. The uplink interference occurs.

This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink interference

is existed.

The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the quality is.

If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level Threshold

and the quality grade of the uplink channel is greater or equal to the value Interf of UL Qual

Threshold.this indicates the signal is good, but the quality is poor, that is, the uplink

interference occurs.

The value range of Rank 0-63 corresponds to the range of -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel

assignment.

If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is set to

NO, the history record priority is ineffective.

Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record priority

preferentially.

This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel assignment.

If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set to

NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.

Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority

preferentially.

This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel

assignment.

If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed and

the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel interference

measurement is performed.

If this parameter is set to YES, the channel with little interference is selected preferentially.

This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel

assignment.

By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.

In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches or

exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the full-rate TCH is

assigned preferentially.

This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm, and thus

controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm.

Yes: Open

No: Close

This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission diversity

or dynamic PBT:

0: not supported

1: dynamic transmission diversity supported

2: dynamic PBT supported

This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. These types include:

Capacity with a higher priority

Quality with a higher priority

PS coordination with a relatively higher priority

PS coordination with an absolutely higher priority

The priority of different types is as follows:

Priority by capacity: capacity factors > quality factors > PS cooperation factors > management

factors

Priority by quality: quality factors > capacity factors > PS cooperation factors > management

factors

Relative priority by PS domain: capacity factors > PS cooperation factors > quality factors >

management factors

Absolute priority by PS domain: PS cooperation factors > capacity factors > quality factors >

management factors

This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one full-rate

TCH is allowed in a cell.

If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot

arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because the

timeslot arrangement is unavailable.

If this parameter is set to Yes, calls may fail when the timeslot arrangement fails and when

the MS does not select the TCHF in the concentric cell.

This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH.

The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured with a

counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to ResTime. The

value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle SDCCHs > 8 + N1,

the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle SDCCH Threshold N1, the

counter increases by 12 within the setting value; if the number of idle SDCCHs = 8 + N1, the

counter remains unchanged. If the value of the counter is equal to or lower than 0 after

adjustment, the SDCCH is converted to the TCH.

When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the SDCCH, it

needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion exceeds the Cell

SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value of this parameter, the

BSC does not initiate the conversion.

If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter,

the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH.

Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from TCHFs to

SDCCHs are as follows:

1.The cell allows the SDCCH dynamic adjustment.

2.(Number of idle TCHFs + number of idle TCHHs/2) ≥ 4 or the number of TRXs in the cell, and

the cell must have at least one idle TCHF.

3.The sum of the number of SDCCHs in the cell plus eight is smaller than the maximum

number of SDCCHs allowed in the cell.

This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is initially

established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0,

1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS

respectively.

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust the

current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate adjustment

threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-interference ratio (CIR) of

the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since

there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an adjustment threshold and an

adjustment hysteresis between the neighboring coding rates.



































































This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of

coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates

contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate

is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this

parameter has five bits.

This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is initially

established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have four values 0,

1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in the ACS

respectively.









































































This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a set of

coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech coding rates

contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is 1, the coding rate

is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding rate. The value of this

parameter has eight bits.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment on the

Um interface fails.

In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from the MS

on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately. Instead, the

BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um interface. Thus the

success rate of assignment can be increased.

Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency band or

of different frequency bands.

If this parameter is set to Same Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned

channel is the same as what is used before the reassignment.

If the parameter is set to Different Band, the frequency band of the preferentially reassigned

channel is different from what is used before the reassignment.

You can set this parameter to improve the deterioration of QoS caused by the interference,

carrier channel fault, or engineering fault.

This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short messages. In

specific cells, sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is disabled to ensure

sufficient radio channels for calls.

The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time to

accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the network.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH function.

This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an MS

when the Abis resources are insufficient.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the MS if

the Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%) or than Fix

Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%).

This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and

preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as

queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when

network resources are occupied.

If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest priority

performs handover, and the MS with higher priority seizes the idle channel after handover. If

the Allow EMLPP is set to No, a certain MS with lower priority releases the channel, the MS

with higher priority seizes the idle channel after release.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.

When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS

maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if the

class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after random

access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This parameter

indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band on

the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.

This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands. It is

sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.

The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early

classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate assignment,

the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as possible. The CM3

(classmark 3) information contains the power information of each band of multi-band MSs. In

the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly described. When paging is made or

the BA2 table is sent between different bands, the CM3 message must be known. For dual-

band MSs, if ECSC is set to No, the MSC sends a CLASSMARK REQUEST message after the MS

reports an EST IND message. The MS then reports the CLASSMARK UPDATE message. The

connection time of the MS is affected.

This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes the

SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08.

Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial value

is set to this parameter value.

Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time an

SACCH message is correctly decoded, the counter S increases by 2.When the counter S is

equal to 0, the downlink radio link is considered as failed.Therefore, when the voice or data

quality is degraded to an unacceptable situation and it cannot be improved through power

control or channel handover, the connection is to be re-established or released.

This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs whose access class is

from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed.

For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when the

access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the

network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed.

Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.

For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to access

the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy

hours. For example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH flow is overloaded, or the Abis

interface flow is overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of some classes, the

traffic volume in this cell may be reduced.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access the

network. This parameter is used for load control.

Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For

example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to access

the network.

During the BTS installation, activation, or cell maintenance test, this parameter can be set to

1. All MSs are not allowed to access the network, thus reducing the impact on installation or

maintenance.

In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur in busy hours. For

example, more RACH burst occurs, the AGCH is overloaded, or the Abis interface is

overloaded.If this parameter is set to 1 for the MSs of some classes, the traffic volume in this

cell may be reduced.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can be sent

by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.

After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the messages

on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group to which the

MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or Immediate

Assignment Extend messages, the MS re-sends Channel Request messages at a specified

interval.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate

assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment message is

not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not exceeded.

Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is

dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or retransmitted.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment retransmission

parameter to the BTS.

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS and

MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This parameter

indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a full-rate channel).

For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200

SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.



indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a half-rate channel).





indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.





indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.





indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multi-frame release.





indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame.



This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3

services.

For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the

T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the SDCCH.

For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the


This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um

interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and

the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0

maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um

interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer T200 and

the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter. SAPI0

maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message services.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over the

Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the

descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over the Um

interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions

of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um

interface.

T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link layer

transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error data link.

The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement retransmission

mechanism.

Each message must be confirmed by the peer end.In unknown cases, both ends are waiting if

a message is lost. At this time, the deadlock of the system occurs.Therefore, the transmit end

must establish a timer. When the timer expires, the transmit end regards that the receive end

does not receive the message and then the transmit end retransmits the message.The

number of retransmissions is determined by N200.T200 and the N200 ensure that the data

link layer sequentially transmits data and that the transmission is free from errors.

For the BTS3X in 03.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies

the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the receive level of the RACH burst is

smaller than the value of RACH Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this access as an invalid one

and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH burst is greater than the value

of RACH Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an access request exists on this timeslot,

and determines together with the value of Random Access Error Threshold whether the RACH

access is valid.

Generally, RACH Busy Threshold is higher than RACH Min.Access Level. Therefore, for the

BTS24, RACH Min.Access Level is shielded. For the BTS2X (excluding the BTS24), the RACH

Min.Access Level parameter is invalid.

This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences.

According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the

random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41 bits)

and calculates the TA value.

This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control:

TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled.

Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden after

the faulty TRX is restored.

Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is performed

immediately after the faulty TRX is restored.

Allowed & Recover When Check Res: The TRX aiding is enabled and the switchback is not

immediately performed after the faulty TRX is restored. Instead, the switchback is performed

during the resource check in the early morning, usually 2 o'clock.

This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this

parameter has six bits.

The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the following

speech versions respectively:

half-rate version 3, half-rate version 2, half-rate version 1, full-rate version 3, full-rate version

2, and full-rate version 1. Here, versions 3, 2, and 1 indicate AMR, EFR, and FR respectively.

If a bit is 1, you can infer that the BSC supports the corresponding speech version. If a bit is 0,

you can infer that the BSC does not support the corresponding speech version.

For example, if the parameter is set to 001011, you can infer that full-rate versions 1-2 and

half-rate version 1 are supported.

In the HDLC networking mode, if only full-rate version 1 among the three full-rate versions is

selected, it is recommended that the AEC delay of all the DSPs in the DPUX and DPUC be set

to 141 so that the downlink traffic flow is further decreased.

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For

details, see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For details,

see Radio Link Timeout (SACCH period(480ms)).

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls. For

details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls. For

details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.

When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller than

or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate target cells.

When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started

if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. The load of the cell is

greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.

This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. The parameter and the paging

times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of retransmissions of the

paging message. The total paging times is approximately equal to this parameter multiplied

by the paging times configured on the MSC side. At present, the Paging Times is set to 4 in the

MSC. The BSC does not support the mechanism for resending the paging message; therefore,

it processes a paging message each time it receives the paging message. The BTS2X, BTS3X,

and double-transceiver BTS support paging retransmission.

For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level threshold

for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state. When the receive

level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that

the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter

only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The threshold setting does not affect the normal

access of the MS.

For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter specifies the level threshold for the

BTS to determine an MS random access.When the receive level of the random access burst

timeslot is greater than this threshold and the access demodulation is successful, the BTS

considers that the timeslot is busy and determines whether the RACH access is valid based on

the parameter Random Access Error Threshold. For the BTS2X, the parameter RACH Busy

Threshold is used to determine whether the timeslot is busy. In addition, the parameter

affects the normal access of the MS. The MS access is allowed only when the level of the MS

random access burst is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold.

For the BTS24, this parameter has two functions. One function is indicating the level threshold

of the MS random access for the system to determine the RACH busy state. When the receive

level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this threshold, the BTS considers that

the timeslot is busy. The other function is indicating whether the MS access is allowed.The MS

access is allowed only when access level (including random access and handover access) is

greater than the threshold.


This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure.

When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the counter for

determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time the

BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter decreases by

1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the counter increases by 2.

When the value of the counter is 0, the radio link fails.The BTS sends a connection failure

indication message to the BSC.The number of SACCH multi-frames and the radio link failure

counter in the system message specify the radio link failure time on the uplink and that on the

downlink respectively. The judgment standard is whether the SACCH message is correctly

decoded.

This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If the

timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends physical

information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for resending physical

information is Ny1.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions.

Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds Ny1

before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the BSC a

connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After receiving the

message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops the timer T3105.

During asynchronous handover, the MS constantly sends handover access bursts to the BTS.

Usually, the Timer T3124 is set to 320 ms. Upon detecting the bursts, the BTS sends a Physical

information message to the MS over the main DCCH/FACCH and sends the

MSG_ABIS_HO_DETECT message to the BSC. Meanwhile, the timer T3105 starts.

The Physical information containing information about different physical layers guarantees

correct MS access. If the timer T3105 expires before the BTS receives the SAMB frame from

the MS, the BTS resends the Physical information message to the MS.

For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and 04.08.

During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if the

traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold, a load

handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover

are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is

triggered.

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband handover

are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding handover decision is

triggered.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover can be

triggered within the period defined by this parameter.

This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL

subcell.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the OL

subcell to the UL subcell.

In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL

Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time

and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target

cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls

in the cell are handed over to the UL subcell by level.

This parameter specifies the period of load handover for each level.

This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is

enabled.

If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload threshold, the

handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of this

parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO period.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL subcell

to the OL subcell.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the UL

subcell to the OL subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general overload

threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the load on the

BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and call drops may

be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed

over to the OL subcell by level.


To prevent ping-pong handovers, this parameter should be decided before the handover from

the OL subcell to the UL subcell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the

signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition for a handover from the OL

subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) - SS(n) < Distance between Boundaries of UL And

OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of UL And OL Subcells.

This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL

subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is, the larger the blank

zone is.

For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL subcells are

determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of serving cell and

that of the adjacent cell. Suppose the signal strength of serving cell is SS(s) and the signal

strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). When SS(s) = SS(n), the system considers that it is the

boundary point of the UL subcell. When SS(s) - SS(n) > Distance between Boundaries of UL

And OL Subcells, it is the coverage area of the OL subcell.

If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter, the

handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell load is not

allowed.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the

load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of Step

length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO

period, thus speeding up the load handover.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some

calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that sends the

channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell.

This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially

processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower Load

Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower Load

Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL subcell. This

parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially

processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general overload

threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell general overload

threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL subcell. This

parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of

this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell. Moreover, the

MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the

UL subcell.

This parameter specifies whether the 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.

Yes: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is allowed.

No: The 3G better cell handover algorithm is forbidden.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell to

the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell to

the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is used

in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70,

corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is used in

concentric cell handover decision.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-

7) x 10.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL subcell

to the UL subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General

OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and the

load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target cell and

call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover algorithm, the calls in the

cell are handed over to the target cell by level.


If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, the

load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value of

Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load

hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the OL

subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, some

calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter, some

calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.

When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the

BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry Time after

UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL subcell to OL

subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. Otherwise, the UL

subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.

After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the OL

subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail.

After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the UL

subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.

If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL

subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO to

avoid ping-pong handovers.

If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the UL

subcell handover.

During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically handled

from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed over to the OL

subcell first.

The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step Period.

This parameter, together with Underlay HO Step Period, controls the level strip of the

handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell. In other words, the time taken in subtracting

Underlay HO Step Level from the handover strip is Underlay HO Step Period.

When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously, calls with lower

level may be handed over first. This does not conform to the principle that the call of the best

quality should be handed over preferentially.

Therefore, the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with higher RX

level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the time taken in

subtracting Underlay HO Step Level from the signal level of the handover strip.

This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL

subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced

concentric cell.

When this parameter is set to Yes,

If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the OL

subcell to UL subcell handover is triggered when the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than

En Iuo Out Cell Low Load Threshold.

If the call is in the UL subcell and the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is triggered, and if the

UL to OL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, a timer is started when the traffic load in the UL

subcell is greater than En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, thus handing over the

MSs in the UL subcell to the OL subcell. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than En Iuo

Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold, the related timer is stopped, and the MSs in the UL

subcell are not handed over to the OL subcell.

When this parameter is set to No, the traffic load in the UL subcell is not taken into account

for triggering the UL subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in

an enhanced concentric cell.

This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and UL

subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL subcell

and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level

Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.

The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.


subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.


and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO Received Level

Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.


In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be processed

in one of the following modes:

Overlaid Subcell: A channel in the OL subcell is preferentially assigned.

Underlaid Subcell: A channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.

No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms.

In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in one of

the following modes:

System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to the

intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the measurement

value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer. During the

comparison and determination, the BSC does not take the RX_LEV Hysteresis into

consideration.



No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms.

If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request

message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is

preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL

subcell is preferentially assigned.

This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the

channel request message during an immediate assignment.

If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is preferentially

assigned during the immediate assignment.

If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel request

message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL subcell is

preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a channel in the UL

subcell is preferentially assigned.

If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current receive

level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink

measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC

determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on

the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-optimum-level Threshold,

and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of Assignment Pref..

Only when the receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to Assign-optimum-level

Threshold and the TA is lower than TA Threshold of Assignment Pref., a TCH in the OL subcell

is preferentially assigned to the MS. Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is preferentially

assigned to ensure successful assignment.

If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current receive

level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on the uplink

measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then, the BSC

determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be assigned based on

the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-optimum-level

Threshold, and the result of comparing the TA and TA Threshold of Assignment Pref..

Only when the uplink receive level on the SDCCH is greater than or equal to Assign-optimum-

level Threshold and the TA is lower than TA Threshold of Assignment Pref., a TCH in the OL

subcell is preferentially assigned to the MS. Otherwise, a TCH in the UL subcell is preferentially

assigned to ensure successful assignment.


In a concentric cell, the TCH can be assigned in the following modes:

System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH, the BSC

determines which service layer should be preferentially selected.

Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.

Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.

No preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment algorithms.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met

for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.


According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover are met

for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is triggered.



subcell.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and

UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL

Threshold, and TA Threshold.


and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO

Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.

#N/A

One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell.

RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL subcell and

UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA

Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the

coverage of the OL subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_QUAL Threshold, UtoO HO

Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA

Hysteresis.


subcell.

When the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL

subcell and UL subcell is determined by RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV Hysteresis, RX_QUAL

Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is

set to Yes, this parameter is invalid.


subcell.



Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is

set to Yes, this parameter is invalid.

The RX_LEV Threshold parameter refers to the threshold of the downlink receive level.


UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion Loss

Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of Different

Frequencies.

Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if the UL

subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of places is five.

The OL subcell and the UL subcell have different transmit power. Therefore, the receive level

of the MS in the UL subcell is different from that in the OL subcell. This parameter specifies

the power that should be compensated for the OL subcell. The value of this parameter should

be the sum of these items: UO Amplifier Power Difference, Combiner Insertion Loss

Difference, Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas, and Pass Loss Difference of Different

Frequencies.

This value is measured at the site. Multiple-point measurements should be performed when

different antennas are used for the OL subcell and UL subcell. If the Enhanced Concentric

Allowed parameter is set to Yes, this parameter is invalid. In other words, the power of the OL

subcell is not compensated.

This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the concentric cell

handover.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive condition

for the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive condition for

the concentric cell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is

enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is

enabled.

This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an intra-

cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher than the

Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger

an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive quality should

be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking.

To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from the

actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level

based on the K principle.

This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS is

handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after HO. This

parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in Huawei II power

control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on the new channel after

handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding call drops caused by too low

a uplink receive level.


This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells of the

cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the Macro,

Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.

If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where the

MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is located at the

Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or Pico layer, penalty is

performed.

This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.

The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter are

regarded as consecutive handovers.

When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a timer

is started to forbid the intra-cell handover.

Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.

This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers

allowed.

If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified threshold, the

two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple consecutive intra-cell

handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.

The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The threshold

equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this threshold, the MS is

regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving slow.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC

starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to N

of the P/N criterion.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the BSC

starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter corresponds to P

of the P/N criterion.

In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level for

every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The handovers

are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the range of (Edge HO

DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth) are handed off

the current serving cell.

The value of Load HO Step Level must be smaller than that of the Load HO Bandwidth.

When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold, all the calls

served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU will

increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic

congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover is

used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels.

This parameter specifies the period for each load handover level.

The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold parameter.

Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV

Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is allowed.

If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs handed

over from other cells. Otherwise, the cell rejects the MSs handed over from other cells.

When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85.

The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell.

The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of this

parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs occupied in

a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover.

System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message packets,

CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control level of the

system.

0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11 indicates the

highest level.

A load handover is allowed only when the system flux is lower than the value of this

parameter. The handover performed over the maximum threshold may have tremendous

impacts on the system. Thus, this parameter should not be set to a higher value.

1) The flow control level algorithm for the assigned system messages: [(Average Message

Usage - Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold)/(Inner Flow Control Discard All Threshold

- Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold) x 100]/10+1 (round-down for division

operation). If the value is smaller than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, Level 0 is

used. If the value is equal to or greater than Inner Flow Control Discard Begin Threshold, the

level is calculated. The value range is from 0 to 11.

2) Flow control threshold for the CPU to start to discard the channel access messages and

paging messages: 80%

. Flow control threshold for the CPU to discard all channel access messages and paging

messages: 100%

. CPU usage smaller than 80% corresponds to level 0. CPU usage equal to or greater than CPU

flow control threshold 80% corresponds to level 2. An increase of 5% means an increase of 2

levels. Level 10 is the highest. The level value can be 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, and 10.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10. An

emergency handover can be triggered only when the uplink receive quality of the MS is

greater than the value of this parameter.


emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is






emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS is


This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR

service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining

whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the receive

quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold.

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference handover

decision. An uplink interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small

value.

When n = 1, that is, when the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30,

this parameter is invalid.

If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or

downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value

of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.

The value of this parameter corresponds to multiplying quality level 0 to 7 by 10.

If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or downlink

receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this

parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.


































If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality of the

non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, uplink

interference or downlink interference exists.


If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or

downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value

of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.


If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement

report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision related

to no downlink measurement report is allowed.

If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive quality is

greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink measurement report

emergency handover is triggered.

When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially selected.

An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if intra-cell

handovers are allowed.

This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm.

If this parameter is set to 0, the no downlink measurement report handover algorithm is

disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is not

allowed in this cell.


enabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is allowed

in this cell.

This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. This

parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for triggering a

rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter Parameters A1 to

A8.

For details, refer to Filter Parameters A1-A8.

This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level. Together

with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The corresponding formula is as

follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be obtained by subtracting 10 from the

configured value, and B is the negative value of the configured value):

C1(nt) = A1 x C(nt) + A2 x C(nt-t) + A3 x C(nt-2t) +…+ A8 x C(nt-7t). Where, C(nt) is the uplink

RX_Level of the serving cell in the MR received at the time of nt. If C1(nt) is smaller than B,

and if C(nt) is below the Edge HO RX_LEV Thrsh., then the signal level is considered to be rapid

dropping.

Filter parameters A1 to A8 may be smaller than or equal to 10. Parameters A1 to A8

correspond to a1 to a8 in the program, and ai = Ai-10 (i = 1-8). Therefore, among a1 to a8 in

the program, there must be values smaller than or equal to 0.

For example, if the receive level drops rapidly in a granularity period, you need to set A3 to A8

to 10, A1 to 0, and A2 to 20. In this case, C1(nt) = a1 x C (nt) + a2 x C(nt-t) = 10C(nt-t)-10C(nt).

To trigger a rapid level drop handover, you should set C1(nt) to a value smaller than B. and

then the fast level drop appears in a MR period. The formula reflects the rapid drop of the cell

level in an MR.

You can configure the filter to define the number of MRs used and the extent to which the

level drops. However, the setting of this parameter is complicated.








dropping.








level in an MR.










dropping.








level in an MR.










dropping.








level in an MR.










dropping.








level in an MR.










dropping.








level in an MR.










dropping.








level in an MR.










dropping.








level in an MR.



This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An

emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is greater

than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold.

When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially

selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if

intra-cell handovers are allowed.

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency handover.

An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is greater than or

equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.

When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be preferentially

selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available and if

intra-cell handovers are allowed.

An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of this

parameter.

This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of

measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB values in

the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be selected.

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after handover

failure due to data configuration.


failure due to the Um interface error.


failure due to cell congestion.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH

NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.

By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding

the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH

NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.

By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding

the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR) handovers.

Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the previous FR-to-HR

handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO

Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the TCH

REP_QUANT.

By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the

case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the SDCCH

REP_QUANT.

By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the

case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for averaging

the CV_BEP on the TCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case

that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.


the CV_BEP on the SDCCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the case

that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is shorter

than the TCH seizure duration for the MS.


the MEAN_BEP on the TCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the

case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.


the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the

case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell after

an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed.

After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving

cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover

to the original serving cell is not allowed.

This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to avoid

ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance. This

parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO.

After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original serving


to the original serving cell is not allowed.

The penalty level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47 dBm.

This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where an

emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated.

During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the

penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original serving

cell is not allowed.

This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell where an

emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This parameter is defined

to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty Time after BQ HO.

After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the serving


to the serving cell is not allowed.


This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell.

This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time.


This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the timing

advance.

The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average the TA

value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover decision.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used for averaging the signal strength in

neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh

Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the channel

quality on the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the signal

strength on the SDCCH.



This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and to

ensure correct handover decisions.



This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during

interpolation.

If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of this

parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed according to two

consecutive MRs that are lost.

If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this parameter, all

lost MRs are discarded, and calculations are made again when new MRs are received.

This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive level of

an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can be selected

as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -110 dBm to -47

dBm.

This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to the

BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC. For

example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed MRs to

the BSC every 0.5 second.

This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the BTS

to the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report to the

BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and the original

MR to the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter determines

whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This parameter is set to YES if

power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set to NO if power control is

performed by the BSC.

This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead of the

maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The purpose is to

minimize system interference and improve signal quality.

This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or the

serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad.

If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed on

the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell.

When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to occur. If a

handover fails, a penalty should be performed on the serving cell. These kinds of penalties can

be performed on cells in one BSC or on external cells.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.

After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be handed over

to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency

handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval.

When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover timer is

started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the timer expires.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No

handover is allowed during the minimum interval.

A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only after

the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The parameter is

used to avoid frequent handovers.

After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only

if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period specified by this

parameter.

After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel only if

the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period specified by this

parameter.

This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB handover

algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL subcell and balance

the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between the UL subcell and the

adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can decrease the interference, improve

the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive frequency reuse of the OL subcell.

0: Close

1: Open

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.

This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled.

0: NO; 1: YES

This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover. When

an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover is

triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the configured H2F HO

Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time

and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.

This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover. When

an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover is

triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the configured F2H HO

Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the Intracell F-H HO Stat Time

and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.

The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the

triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive

seconds with P measurement seconds.

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-

cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This

parameter is used with the two parameters.

This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intra-cell

full-rate to half-rate handover are met.

The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is, the

triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N consecutive

seconds with P measurement seconds.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the intra-

cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO Threshold. This

parameter is used with the two parameters.

This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does not

affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover.

The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an

adjacent cell.

Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the candidate cell

for handover + Minimum access level offset)

The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum uplink

power of the candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset); otherwise, the M

criterion is not met.

The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the adjacent

cell.

Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min

Access Level Offset)

The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL Power on

HO Candidate Cell + Min Access Level Offset); otherwise, the M criterion is not met.


This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. This

parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers.

Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold - Inter-

layer HO Hysteresis

Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold +

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis of an adjacent cell - 64.

This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate cells for

handovers.


This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are allowed

The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent 3G cell and

from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.

According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering conditions of

PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and

the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.



PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT handover is triggered and

the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.


According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the

serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is

triggered.


According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in the

serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical handover is

triggered.



edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent

cell is triggered.



edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover to the adjacent

cell is triggered.


According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding

edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is

triggered.


According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its corresponding

edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge handover is

triggered.


If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a period, the

edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover

threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover

threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel

interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based

on the handover performance statistics and the actual network performance to achieve the

UL/DL balance.


If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a period, the

edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge handover

threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the edge handover

threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference, and adjacent channel

interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold should be adjusted based

on the handover performance statistics and the actual network performance to achieve the

UL/DL balance.


This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled.

When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality is

lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is

triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over.

This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The concentric cell

is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency reuse of

the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system capacity and conversation

quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the UL subcell to OL subcell

handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.

This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA

handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA

threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is

triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The longer

the distance is, the greater the TA value is.

This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a BQ

handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER). When the

UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold. a BQ emergency

handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal level or channel

interference.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS makes

a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To avoid such a call

drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level of the serving cell is

lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive level of the serving cell is

lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is handed over to a neighbor cell.

This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are set to

different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical handover. Then,

based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells with high priority (priority

is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).

This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover algorithm.

Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search for a desired cell

in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The cell must have less

path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong handovers, the PBGT handover

can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the same layer and hierarchy. The PBGT

handover cannot be performed on SDCCHs.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this function

is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call drop caused by

the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS.

This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed over to

a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be

handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is recommended that

this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The

fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special conditions.

This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled.

The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel

assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network

performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the TCHs in

the cells of the same layer.

The load handover is used as an emergency measure instead of a primary measure to adjust

abnormal traffic burst in partial areas. If load handovers occur frequently in a partial area, the

cell and TRX configuration of BTSs and the network layout should be adjusted.

This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-cell

handover is not subject to this parameter.

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the

sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of cell

reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08

and 04.08.

This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only before

the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and 0408.

This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS where cell

reselection parameters can be obtained.

If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2

from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this parameter is set to 1, the

MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2 from other bytes of the system

information type 7 or 8 message.

This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2.

If this parameter is properly configured, the number of handovers can be reduced and a

better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for an

MS to access the cell when CRO increases.

Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring

uncertainties to the network.In addition, the same CRO applies to the cells with the same

priority.For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.

This parameter affects only GSM Phase II MSs or GSM PhaseII+ MSs.

This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell

reselection.

1: barred

0: allowed

Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM Rec.

04.08.

Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority

0 0 Normal Normal

0 1 Barred Barred

1 0 Low Normal

1 1 Low Normal

Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel, indicates

whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.

Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details, see

GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based cell

reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.

When PI is set to 1, the MS obtains the value of C2 based on the broadcast system

information and determines whether a cell is reselected. When PI is set to 0, that is, C2

equals C1, the MS determines whether a cell is reselected based on the value of C1.

This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between different

LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the possibility of

losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell reselection hysteresis.

This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.

In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period

decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the network

increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location update period

decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average standby time is greatly

shortened.When setting this parameter, take into consideration the processing capability of

the MSC and BSC, the load on the A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.

Generally, a larger value is adopted in continuous coverage in urban areas and a smaller value

in suburbs, rural areas, or blind spots.

This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel, that is,

the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel.

In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details, see

GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08.

If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell

increases, thus reducing the number of MSs served by each paging sub-channel and

prolonging the average service time of the MS battery. For details about the calculation of the

paging group, see GSM Rec. 05.02. But the delay of paging messages increases, and the

system performance deteriorates as the value of this parameter increases.

This parameter should be set on the basis that the paging channel is not overloaded. In

addition, the value of the parameter should be as small as possible. The load of the paging

channels should be periodically measured on the running network. The value of this

parameter should be adjusted on the basis of the load.

A paging message must be sent simultaneously in all the cells in an LAC. Thus, the capacity of

the paging channel in a cell, that is, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell, must be the

same as or similar to that in other cells of an LAC.

This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the CCCH is

configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and PCH.

This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is an

information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages.

If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding

measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each bit

maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is 0, the MS

does not measure the cell level of NCC N.

This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA).

Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed.

Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.

Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For details,

see GSM Rec. 04.08.

Cell_Bar_Qualify Cell_Bar_ Access Cell selection priority Cell reselect priority

0 0 Normal Normal

0 1 Barred Barred

1 0 Low Normal

1 1 Low Normal

This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive transmissions of

channel request messages by an MS.

To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH, an access

algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. The algorithm specifies three parameters: Tx-integer

(T for short), maximum number of retransmissions (RET), and S related to channel

combination.

This parameter works with the configuration of the CCCH to determine the parameter S. The

relations between this parameter and the configuration of the CCCH are as follows:

When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 55 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a

physical channel.

When this parameter is set to 3, 8, 14, or 50, S is 41 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical

channel.

When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 76 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a physical

channel.

When this parameter is set to 4, 9, or 6, S is 52 if the CCCH and SDCCH share a physical

channel.

When this parameter is set to 5, 10, or 20, S is 109 if the CCCH and SDCCH do not share a

physical channel.


channel.


physical channel.


channel.


physical channel.


channel.

The timeslot for sending messages is a random value from the collection of {0, 1…, MAX(T, 8)-

1}.

The number of timeslots (excluding the timeslot used to send messages) between two

adjacent channel request messages is a random value from the collection of {S, S+1, …, S+T-1}.

When T increases, the interval between two adjacent channel requests increases, and RACH

conflicts decrease.

When S increases, the interval between two adjacent channel request messages increases,

and RACH conflicts decrease, thus improving the usage of AGCH and SDCCH.

The access time of the MS, however, is prolonged and the network performance is decreased

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function. For

different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.

If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is powered

off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.

If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the test

duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. If TDM transmission

is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 10 ms; if IP transmission is used on the

Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms.

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR encoding

mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication

message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) stops; if the

timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR encoding

mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the ReleaseIndication

message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) stops; if the

timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.

In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the HANDOVER

COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the HANDOVER

COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.

This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element when

the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.

After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another

attempt to access the network after the timer expires.

For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR INDICATION,

CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages are received, and

the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call is. Upon receipt of a

CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST

message after the timer expires.

This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the channel

deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to reserve a

period of time for repeated link disconnections.

The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS. the RF

CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.

The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC receives

the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC deactivates the

channel, if the timer T3109 expires.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a handover

command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the outgoing BSC

handover fails.

This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a handover

request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or inter-BSC

handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.

After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer

T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message. After

the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.

In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the timer T7

is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a handover

acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an outgoing BSC

handover failure message.

In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover

command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a Handover

Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.

The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC message

before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases the seized

SDCCH channel.

This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.

The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC receives

an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires before the BSC

receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable.

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable.

This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping

supports the intelligent power consumption decrease.

Qtru Signal Merge Switch

The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between uplink

signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot.

The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second. If

the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of this

timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be

recorded.

During the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, a forced handover is

initiated on the calls with the highest uplink signal strength in the timeslot, and the calls

should be handed over to another timeslot.

P specifies the Observed time of uplink received level difference, and N specifies the Duration

of uplink received level difference.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to

send within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed to send

within a statistical period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell paging

group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.

This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an

integral multiple of 50 ms.

The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging message

packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to cells; otherwise,

the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.

This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that is,

whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics algorithm II,

when the frequency scanning function is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the cell is

out of service.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell is out

of service.

When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if the

cell is out of service.

This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS services

of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be preempted.

This parameter specifies whether the CS services preempt the sublink resources of PS

services.

This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel through

assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the assignment

procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers.

Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies. The

scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell.

This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency scanning

task to the reporting of a scanning result.

Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and diversity

levels during the scanning of main and diversity antennas

Maximum/Mean: maximum and mean values of the uplink receive level

0 specifies optimization.

1 specifies no optimization.

When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover

timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.

When the call drop counters are not optimized, the call drops caused by this reason are

contained in the statistics of call drops.



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell

handover are not contained in the statistics of call drops.





When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC handover

are not contained in the statistics of call drops.





When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC handover






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are not






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long time

for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops.





When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover failure






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault are not






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link fault






When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by the BTS

because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call reestablishment

times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the statistics of call drops.





When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except for

the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource

unavailable are not contained in the statistics of call drops.





When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention are not






In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in the

statistics of call drops.





When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure are not






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are not






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM response






When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are not




This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. The function of repeater

is simpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is used for the

wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only the repeater can

improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic volume of network.

The setting of this parameter affects the handover. Because the distance between repeaters

is long, the handover between repeaters can only be asynchronous. Otherwise, the handover

may fail.

This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is

initialized.

The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts

immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this

parameter is used to specify a delay.

This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface.

The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested, some

service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The flow control

on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by Abis flow.

By default, flow control on the Abis interface is performed.

This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of the

cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message.

This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell re-

selection parameters in the system information type 3 message.

This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.05.

In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19, mapping

to the following: {43,41,39,37,35,33,31,29,27,25,23,21,19,17,15,13,11,9,7,5} respectively.

Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 5 (mapping to 33 dBm).

The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 19 (mapping to 5 dBm). Other

transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.

In a GSM1800 or GSM1900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to

31, mapping to the following:

{30,28,26,24,22,20,18,16,14,12,10,8,6,4,2,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,36,34,32} respectively.

Generally, the maximum transmit power supported by an MS is level 0 (mapping to 30 dBm).

The minimum transmit power supported by an MS is level 15 (mapping to 0 dBm). Other

transmit power levels are reserved for high-power MSs.

This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and 6

messages.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive level in

FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX.

This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request is

sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the requested

bandwidth by the ActGene.

The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When the

resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times. The effect

of the ActGene is from 0.5 to 1.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.

This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the

antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the north to

the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.

This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna Azimuth

Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell.

Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2

This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load measurement.

The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines whether

an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication message to

the BSC.

The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and AGCH

overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.

This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot, that is,

the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages (such as paging

messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For details, see GSM Rec.

08.58.

If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically sends

the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The interval for sending the CCCH overload message

is CCCH Load Indication Period(s).

This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages.

This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For details,

see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load Threshold, the BTS

periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH overload messages

include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH overload messages.

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication messages,

informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the radio resource

indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle channel in the

measurement period.


The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the

parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER threshold.

The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.

This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to Yes,

the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS, and

reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm.

This parameter together with VSWR TRX Error Threshold is used to detect whether the

antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value, the

error is small.



antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output power of a

TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The Power output error

threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two thresholds of the error.If

the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller.


When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is

generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate

the two thresholds of the error.

For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the time

the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not installed.

The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3 greater

than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed.

This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the MS

and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized.

The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the same

BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH signals of

adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power

decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power control

and static power control.

For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, this

parameter is invalid.

For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS, power control is performed on the basis of the

power level of a TRX.

This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged.

Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC, the interference levels

on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. The result is used

to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference bands.

For details, see GSM Rec. 08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.

This parameter specifies the threshold used for interference measurement.

The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates and

reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to assign

channels.

According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified into

six interference levels. The values of these levels are called Interf. Band Thresholds. The BTS

determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, sends a radio

resource indication message to the BSC. The BSC compares the busy and idle channels

reported in the measurement report and in the radio resource indication message to

determine whether to perform a handover. The interference band measurement result

provides reference for threshold setting and interference analysis. For details, see GSM Rec.

08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.

If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too small, the interference is too

obvious. If the difference between the values of two thresholds are too great, the interference

is not reflected.




channels.








08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.



is not reflected.




channels.








08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.



is not reflected.




channels.








08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.



is not reflected.




channels.








08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.



is not reflected.




channels.



determines the interference level based on these thresholds. The BTS, then, reports a radio





08.08, 08.58, and 12.21.



is not reflected.

If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if the

following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. The load of

the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.

This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption, the

discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that supports

the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are interested in.

This prolongs the service time of the MS battery.

The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the MSs

can use the DRX function. The period occupied by broadcast short messages that are

contained in a dispatching message is called a dispatching period. The description and

position of the broadcast short message are contained in the dispatching message in the

sending sequence.

This parameter specifies the data service supported.

This value of the parameter can be set as required.

0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported.

0000000010: indicates that only the NT12K data service is supported.


0000001000: indicates that only the T14.4K data service is supported.





0100000000: indicates that only the T600BITS data service is supported.

1000000000: indicates that only the T1200/75 data service is supported.

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum before

the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. In addition, the BTS transmit power is not

adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover.

When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC cannot

adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive the handover

command, thus leading to the call drop.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this

parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a per VQI

basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality is good. The

traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the speech quality is

monitored.

This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies participate

in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality

gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC needs to consider this gain.




















in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell, the receive quality


This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC increases

the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC decreases

the uplink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive

quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink receive

quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive

quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink receive


This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is

lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is

greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive quality is

lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive quality is


When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.The

value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is

performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -

47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink power

control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink power

control.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of downlink

receive quality.

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink

receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential filtering

formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering

formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC

increases the downlink power.

This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC decreases the

downlink transmit power.

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink receive
















When the receive level is higher than the threshold, the downlink power control is


47 dBm).



47 dBm).

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink

power control.

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink power

control.


receive quality.


receive level.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential filtering

formula.

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential filtering

formula.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in a

power control period.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH in a

power control period.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control

commands.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power control

commands.

When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this

parameter, the power control stops.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.

0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL Qual.

Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of DL Qual.

Bad UpLEVDiff.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this

threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad

UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the downlink power

control.

Level 0: BER smaller than 0.2%

Level 1: BER ranges from 0.2% to 0.4%






Level 7: BER greater than 12.8%

In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual. Bad

Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad

UpLEVDiff.

In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this

threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This

parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.









This parameter specifies the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the

receive quality.

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the receive

level.


receive quality.

This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality

zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.

In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2,

≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum permissible

down adjustment step.

When the downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum

permissible down adjustment step differs based on the receive quality.

This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in power

control when the RQ is 2.

This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the quality

zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level.















When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper threshold

and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the signal quality

exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed.

This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.

The mapping between the BER and the quality level is as follows:










and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality exceeds the

upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed. This parameter

specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.










The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an upper

threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level is between

the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed only when the

signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.










specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control.












upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is performed.

This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone.

Note: The power of the MS and the BTS is adjusted according to the quality and the level. For

details, refer to the Power Control 2nd Generation Control table.




















This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for predicting

the level in power control.

In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history measurement

report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction function is applied in the

filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting the

level in power control.




This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is allowed

by Huawei II power control algorithm.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the currently

received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation queue and then

records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the

measurement report. After values are added in the measurement report, compensate the

receive level value in the history measurement report based on the change of the power.

When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering

on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement

reports. The measurement reports may be obtained at different transmit power of the

BTS/MS. To ensure the accuracy of the values for filtering, the values in the history

measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power

must be compensated.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating the

average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.


average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.


average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.


average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR power

control commands.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.Class

0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this parameter is set 5, the

power ranges from class 0 to class 4.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the DL

Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of the

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value

of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad


control.









In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL Qual.

Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad

UpLEVDiff.

In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of

this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff. This

parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.









This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the signal

quality.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the

receive level.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on the

receive quality.

In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-2, ≥ 3)

based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set for each

quality zone.

When downward power adjustment is performed based on the level, the maximum


This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step when RQ is 2.



quality zone.






quality zone.




After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period before

receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is

based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power

adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the BTS.

Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.

To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control algorithm implements the

prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC samples several downlink

measurement reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports from

the current time onwards in a short period.

This parameter determines the number of downlink measurement reports predicted by the

BSC. The value of this parameter equals to the previous number N.




After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period before

receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control decision is

based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during the power

adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive quality of the MS.

Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.

To compensate the delay of power adjustment, the power control algorithm implements the

prediction and filtering function. In other words, the BSC samples several uplink measurement

reports, performs weighted filtering, and predicts N measurement reports from the current

time onwards in a short period.

This parameter determines the number of uplink measurement reports predicted by the BSC.

In other words, the value of this parameter equals to the previous number N.




This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed by

Huawei II power control algorithm.

When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted filtering on

the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history measurement

reports. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at different transmit

power. To ensure the accuracy of the values for filtering, the values in the history

measurement reports that are obtained at a different transmit power from the current power

must be compensated.


average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.


average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.


average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.


average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.

This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei III

power control algorithm.




specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for power control.













specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for power control.























specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power control.













specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power control.




















This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power control

commands.

This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power

control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.

This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is measured for

the uplink power control.

This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is used to

set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode.

This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the

signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the

downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of the MS output

power. The parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode, which is

used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode.

This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter the

signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the downlink

signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output power. The

parameter specifies the relation between Cn and Cn-1.

This parameter specifies the initial power level.

This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the MS uses

the GPRS dynamic power control.

This parameter is used for the open-loop power control.

The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH, namely,

PCH.

When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the reduced

level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss.

This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3105.

After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.

Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the N3105

when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink RLC data

block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105 by one and

resends the downlink data block in which the RRBP field is set.

When N3105 overflows, the network initiates the T3195. When the timer T3195 expires, the

current TBF abnormally releases.

This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103.

Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete, the network

sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the N3103.

If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within scheduled

time, the N3103 increases by one and the network resends the Packet Uplink Ack/Nack

message.

When this counter overflows, the network initiates the T3169. When this timer expires, the

current TBF abnormally releases.


In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if the

downlink data blocks carry the USF value.

After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is established),

the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping to each USF for

the uplink data sent from the MS. If the network receives valid uplink data blocks from the

MS, the network resets the N3101; otherwise, the N3101 increases by one.

When this counter overflows, the current uplink TBF abnormally releases.

This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF.

After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data blocks

are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this TBF but

forcedly set the last data block not received. Therefore, keep this TBF unreleased by

continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative Reserved Block Period

(RRBP) flag. During the release delay of a downlink TBF, as long as the upper layer of the

network has a requirement of downlink data transmission, the extracted downlink RLC blocks

can be sent on this downlink TBF. At the same time, the status of the downlink TBF changes

from release delay to downlink transmission. In addition, during the release delay, the MS

must send the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message on the uplink data block corresponding to

the RRBP to maintain the communication with the network. Therefore, when the MS needs to

send the uplink data, it can send an uplink request through Channel Request Description

carried in the Packet Downlink Ack/Nack message.

The value 0 specifies that release delay function of the downlink TBF is disabled.

This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF.

Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that supports the

extended uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink TBF immediately but

set it to the inactive mode. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks during inactive period, the

MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active instead of establishing a new uplink

TBF. When the inactive period expires, if no uplink RLC data block needs to be transmitted,

the network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ac message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of

releasing the uplink TBF. In addition, when an uplink TBF is inactive, a downlink TBF can still

establish on this uplink TBF.

The extended uplink TBF function can greatly improve the network KPIs, especially for the

discontinuous uplink transmission (such as interactive transmission and Ping) services.

The value 0 specifies that the extended uplink TBF function is disabled (Also deactivate this

function on the BSC side).

This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF.

Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0), the network sends the MS a

Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink TBF. To

establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will notify the MS of

releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. After the downlink

TBF establishes successfully or after the delay time exceeds the setting time of non-extended

uplink TBF, this uplink TBF will automatically release.

The value 0 specifies that the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF is disabled.

This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be

controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level is

lower than this threshold.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the receive

quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is

worsened.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the

MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is

worsened.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the

MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission quality is

worsened.

This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is lower

than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection Watch Period; If

the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is allowed.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell are

continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is

allowed.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is allowed.

This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell

reselection procedure.


neighbor cells.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the number

of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is thought to be

invalid.

This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can receive

the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will receive the

MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF multiplexing rate is lower

than corresponding percentage.

The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.

This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the

downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of MS.

The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively calculated

number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission quality measurement

report reaches this threshold.

This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined when

the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality measurement report is

lower than this threshold.

This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty can be

performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.

This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the cell

reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This

parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.

To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the level of

the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold and the Cell

Reselection Hysterisis.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as a

candidate cell for handover.

This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization.

The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS level is

determined in the subscription.

The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay class, and

throughput class.

During the negotiation of a QoS profile, an MS can apply a value for each QoS attribute. After

receiving the request from the MS, the network negotiates a class for each attribute of each

QoS profile based on the current effective GPRS resources. The network provides the

negotiated QoS profile with corresponding resources.

Not Support: QoS not supported;

Support: QoS supported.

This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and the

overlaid subcell in a PS domain.

In version V9R8, the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the

underlaid subcell, and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the underlaid

subcell.

The overlaid-to-underlaid subcell handover, underlaid-to-overlaid subcell handover, bi-

directional handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell, and no handover

between between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell are allowed for the handover

between the underlaid subcell and the overlaid subcell in a PS domain; by default, this

parameter is set to no handover between overlaid subcell and underlaid subcell.

This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services.

The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network should

support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the transmission

delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.

If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the ABQP

must be lower than the value of this parameter.

POC：push to talk over cellular.

This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.




If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth

GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the bandwidth for the

POC services.


This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.




If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink bandwidth

GbrValue required by the ABQP must be lower than the upper limit of the bandwidth for the

POC services.


This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the assignment of

the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the takeover of the uplink

immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, after the

packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves uplink resources for the BTS. The

BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS by interpreting the downlink

acknowledgment message from the MS, and assigns the reserved uplink resources to the MS.

Then, the MS can send the data blocks.

This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate

assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment.

To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, the BSS pre-allocates the uplink TBF

resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel request,

the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment message to the

MS. Upon receiving the immediate assignment message sent by the BTS, the MS can upload

the data block. Meanwhile, the BTS needs to send the additional channel request message to

the BSC. Upon receiving this request message, the BSC sends the additional immediate

assignment message to the BTS to complete the setup of the TBF process.

When both the MS and the network support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained from the

ABQP in the PFC.

When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained from

the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS.

Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.

PFC: packet flow context.

ABQP：Aggregate BSS QoS Profile.

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for

transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust the

MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs.

This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value among

MCS1-MCS9.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to

UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for

transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS types

of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all TBFs.

This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value among

MCS1-MCS9.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected.

This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to

calculate the measurement results.

This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data

transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to

dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment, thus improving the quality of links.

- Setting and effect

Link Adaption (LA): The network dynamically adjusts the coding scheme of a channel based on

the transmission quality of the channel link. The link quality is determined by 8PSK MEAN BEP

and 8PSK CV BEP carried in the Packet EGPRS Downlink Ack/Nack message. The network

selects a proper coding scheme for transmission based on the measurement reports from the

MS. For cells with good Um interface quality, the LA mode is usually used.

Incremental Redundancy (IR): The network should retransmit only different data blocks with

the puncturing coding scheme. The MS buffers the history error information and the data

blocks are retransmitted through combined error correction. In the cell with bad Um interface

quality, the IR mode can achieve good transmission quality, but the MS must support this

mode. For cells with bad Um interface quality, the IR mode is usually used.

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the downlink TBF

to change from CS4 to CS3.

When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this

parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.











When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of

this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS3 to CS4.









This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.

To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the first

TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based

on the signal transmission quality.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2,

CS3, or CS4.

If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink TBF to

change from CS4 to CS3.

When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of this

parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.











When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of this










This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.

To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first TBF

through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted based on

the signal transmission quality.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1, CS2,

CS3, or CS4.

If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class service

is a kind of traffic class services.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS THP3.


This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS ARP3.


This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1 (ARP1).

This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.

When a channel is idle, this timer is started.

When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.

This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services.

This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and PS

services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted.

All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the

dynamic channels.

Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all the

dynamic channels except for the control channels.

Dynamic channels carrying services cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services

cannot preempt the dynamic channels that carry services.

This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs on the

dynamic channel are released.

If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released

immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.

Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be used

and the timer is stopped.

When the timer expires, the dynamic channel is released.

This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.

This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.

The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.

The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.

When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic

channels are used.

This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.

When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10, dynamic

channels are used.

This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of TCHs and

PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs + static PDCHs).

This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number of TCHs + PDCHs.

This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.

Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of one

strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the frequencies of

three strongest cells

This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.

The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is used

for cell reselection.

This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell.

Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.

This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet control

channel.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the system.

This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs

customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.

This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection.

Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.

Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.

This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas.

When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target

cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level

of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell, and when the

signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.

This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.

Yes: The MS can access another cell.

No: The MS cannot access another cell.

This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during

cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1

0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.

1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.

This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31

standards.

c31standard: applied

c31notuse: not applied

This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area.

When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the target

cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped area of two

adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio channels. Therefore,

the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell reselection not only increases

the signaling flow on the network and affects the utilization of radio resources, but also

greatly affects the data transmission rate of the MS and decreases the QoS as a consequence.

When this parameter is used, the MS starts cell reselection only when the signal level of the

neighbor cells in the same routing area is higher than that of this cell, and when the signal

level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is hard to start cell reselection.

This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.

Yes: supported

No: not supported

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to the

network.

This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies many

resources.

This parameter specifies the persistence level 4 of radio priority access.

A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the persistence

level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.










This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random

access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request after

the channel request fails.

This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive channel

requests.

The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received after the

minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority 4.The 2bit

Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four

levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority.










This parameter specifies the access control class.

This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges

from 1 to 12.

Value 1 indicates one PRACH.

Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.

...

Value 12 indicates 12 PRACHs.

This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges

from 1 to 12.

Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.

Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs.

...

Value 12 indicates four PBCCHs.

This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter ranges

from 1 to 4.

Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.

Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.

Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.

Value 4 indicates four PBCCHs.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet transfer

mode.

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet idle

mode.

This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode after

the NC NC-measurement report is sent.

The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report is

sent.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value

indicates a higher access priority.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent

through the system message broadcast in each cell.

When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative

offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.

This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.

Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the BCCH is

shorter than the penalty time.

Value infinity indicates an infinity offset.

This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports.

This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report

Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3.

Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network

regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should contain the

received signal level and BSIC.

Type 2: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the network.

For the six carriers, the BSIC must be decoded successfully and the NCC specified by

NCC_PERMITTED is carried. The measurement report should contain the received signal level

and BSIC.

Type 3: The MS does not need to decode the BSIC of the carriers that send the measurement

report. The measurement report should contain the received signal level and interference

measurement of a carrier.

This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3 of

the extension measurement report.

This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS. The MS

reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report that matches

the bitmap.

The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle mode,

it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0 or em1.

This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported.

Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.

No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.

This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.

Yes: supported

No: not supported

This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell.

This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio Priority

message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four levels of

priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When an MS

accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel Request message

with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for establishing the TBF for a channel

only when the radio priority reaches the access priority of the cell.

The values of this parameter area as follows:

No packet access

Packet access of level 1

Packet access of levels 1-2



This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH

of the cell.

SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the

SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional.

Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.

No: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is not transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.

In the cell reselection required by the network, the network requests the MS to send

measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are three network control modes.

nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.

nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the

network and performs automatic cell reselection.

nc2: Network control. The MS sends measurement reports to the network but does not

perform automatic cell reselection.

This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102.

Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No use

indicates that this parameter is not used.

This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet Downlink

Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A), the MS increases

N3102 by PAN_INC.

Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use


This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS decreases

N3102 by PAN_DEC.

Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use


This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS.

This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The

parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer.

Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is set to

Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message

before T3198 expires, it updates the receive state of each uplink RLC data block based on the

acknowledgment bitmap contained in the message. If T3198 for the RLC data block in the

Pending state expires, the MS sets the receive state of this data block to Nack and retransmits

the data block.

This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS.

If four access pulses are used, the timing advance can be obtained without a polling message.

If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by sending a

polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.

This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and PTCCH/U.

The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment message.

8bit: access using the 8-bit burst


SI13 indicates the access burst type.

This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX (discontinuous

reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message.

The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet transfer

mode to the packet idle mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all the CCCH blocks

during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS context. The reservation

time depends on the smaller value between DRX_Timer_Max and NON_DRX_TIMER.

NON_DRX_TIMER is negotiated with the SGSN during the GPRS attachment of the MS and its

value is usually high. Therefore, the reservation time actually depends on DRX_TIMER_MAX.

Value 0 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode immediately.

Value 1 indicates that the MS enters the DRX mode one second later. Value n indicates that

the MS enters the DRX mode n seconds later.

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after receiving

the last data block.

When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and confirms

that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet Downlink

Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts T3192 at the

same time.

If T3192 expires, the MS releases the TBF resources and monitors paging channels. During the

TBF release process, if the MS is in half-duplex mode and receives the Packet Uplink

Assignment message, the MS responds immediately.

If the MS does not receive the Packet Uplink Assignment message during the TBF release

process, the MS enters the packet idle mode. If the MS is in dual transfer mode, it enters the

dedicated mode.

This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink Assignment

message.

This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink

Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet Downlink

Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to wait for the

Packet Uplink Assignment message from the network.

If the MS receives the Packet Uplink Assignment message before T3168 expires, T3168 is

reset. Otherwise, the MS initiates the PS access procedure again for four times. If the Packet

Uplink Assignment message is still not received, the MS regards that this uplink TBF

establishment has failed.

Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation modes are classified

into Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network Operation Mode

III.

When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used.

When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is used.

When the Gs interface is not configured but the PCCCH is configured, Network Operation

Mode III is used.

Configuration Policy NSN PARAMETER

Name Parameter Name

BAND frequency band in use

The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If the

number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is high.

This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a cell.

The priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells for

NoneMCC mobile country code

None MNC mobile network code

This parameter should be set as required.

NCC BSIC NCC

1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end and the

receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact position of the

other bits in the same burst and to determine whether the

received co-channel signals are useful signals. If a burst is inconBCC bsIdentityCode

Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If the

number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This parameter

along with Layer of the Cell determines the priority of a cell. The

priority affects the sequencing of neighbor cells fo

None

None

None

GENA GPRSenabled

None

None

EGENA egprsEnabled

None

Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is

in the packet transmission mode, the network informs the MS of

the system information about neighbor cells in advance.

No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in

the packet

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the information

about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there are more than 32

neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC reports the

information about a maximum of 32 neighbor cells to the PC

None

None

BAND frequency band in use

None

RAC routing area code

None

None

None

None

HOP HoppingMode

The discontinuous transmission (DTX) function allows a

transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice

transfer. This function has the following benefits:

1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the MS

and reducing system int

The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate

may be affected. DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None

DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup

None

AHOP

None

As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a concentric

cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell. The TRXs of the

OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use different frequency reuse

modes.

The concentric cell technology can be combined

None

When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not

configured in the UL subcell.

The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission

in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following

benefits:


and reducing system interference

2. On the downlink DTX dtxMode

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is

allowed.

If this parameter is set to No, the average call drop rate

decreases. In suburban areas and urban areas with poor

coverage, this parameter should be set to No.

Call reestablishmentRE callReestablishmentAllowed

If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of

received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on

the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call

drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based RXP rxLevAccessMin

None

None

DR drInUse

None

DYNAMIC_SDCCH

None

NonePENA powerCtrlEnabled

None

None

None TRX_ID TRX ID

None

TRX_NUM

None

CI CellId

NoneBTS_ID BTS ID

None

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and boards

in this BTS will be activated.

Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs,

and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.

When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be set to

Not Activated if the Active State of the upper-level BTS is set to

Not Activated. STATE Administrative State

Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and

assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also manually assigned

to meet the requirement of operators. The manually assigned

OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when the timeslot is arranged.

The manually assigned OML timeslots can only be modified

manually.

This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.



None

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied

subrack.

None

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the occupied E1

port.

If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface board,

the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must be set to

different E1 ports on the interface board.

This parameter is to be viewed only.

None

None

None

The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all

versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH,

including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The double-transceiver

BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH, including the timeslot

FH and frame FH, but do not support the cross-cabinet baseband

FH.

Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power Level;

however, when the antenna is over high and covers too many

cells, you should lower the antenna and increase the tilt of the

antenna first. When the transmit power of a BTS reduces, the

indoor coverage becomes worse.

Generally, for cells of the same priority in a network, the power

level configuration should ensure that the EIRPs of the cells are

basically the same.

When configuring the power level, you should note that different

TRXs in a cell can have different losses due to different

combination modes.

None

None

The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is. In

other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the TRX with

higher priority.

None

None

This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

RDIV diversityUsed

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the

cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the TRX

output power, resulting in the failure of channel allocation.

None



None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and

physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this

parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.

This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set to

Auto.

You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to

Manual.

When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is 0.

None

None

None

None

The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the handover success rate

may be affected. DMAX msMaxDistanceInCallSetup


transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no voice

transfer. This function has the following benefits:



2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS,

reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation

inside the BTS

3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference

is reduced and the network quality is improved.

The DL DTX function is also restricted by the MSC.To enable this

function, the DTX function must be enabled on the MSC side.

If downlink DTX is disabled on the MSC side, downlink DTX cannot

be used irrespective of the setting of this parameter.

If downlink DTX is enabled on the MSC side, the setting of this

parameter determines whether downlink DTX is used in a cell.

DOWNLINK DTX

None

None

None

None

DR drInUse

None

If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level of

received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to camp on

the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the risk of call

drops. In such a case, you must set the parameter based on the

balance conditions of the uplink and downlink levels. RXP rxLevAccessMin

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment is

allowed.




Call reestablishment lasts for a long time, and therefore the

subscriber cannot wait and hooks on. It is recommended that this

parameter be set to Yes. RE callReestablishmentAllowed

The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power transmission

in the case of no voice transfer. This function has the following

benefits:



2. On the downlink: decreasing power consumption of the BTS,

reducing system interference, and reducing intermodulation

inside the BTS

3. From the network perspective, the inter-frequency interference

is reduced and the network quality is improved. DTX dtxMode

None

None

None

None

None

None

When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU board

exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the power

sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data configuration

detects that the power sharing must be used, but the

corresponding downlink power control of a cell is disabled. The

power must be adjusted or the downlink power control must be

enabled.

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels

are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of

overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channels can be

assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate channels are

assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of

overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the half-rate channel

even if there are enough full-rate channels, which influences the

speech quality.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate channels

are assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of

overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-rate channels can be

assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity of the BSC is reduced.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the half-rate channels are

assigned to the MS only when the channel seizure ratio of

overlaid subcell is very low. The calls use the half-rate channel

even if there are enough full-rate channels, which influences the

speech quality.

None

HSN1 hoppingSequenceNumber1

None

FLEXIBLE MAIO

MANAGEMENT

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence may

be reduced but the judgment of channel status may not be in

time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the judgment is

imprecise.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH

seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure duration for the

MS.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of

accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of channel

status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value,

the judgment is imprecise.

This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused

by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

When this parameter is set to a higher value, the impact of

sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is delayed.

Thus, the network performance is degraded.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the interference

indication message will not be reported even though the

interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value, the

interference indication message will be reported even though no

interference exists.
















None

None

TRP trxPriorityInTCHAlloc

None

None

None

It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in

multiband network.

None

None

Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH Adjust

Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail in the

concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends that this

parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot arrangement

can be performed in the cell.

If this parameter is set too small, it cannot correctly indicate the

idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the rollback of

SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and affects the network

performance.

If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation algorithm

becomes less sensitive and consequently the SDCCHs stay in idle

state and cannot be rolled back for a long period of time.

If this parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell may be

insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be initiated, thus

affecting the access of users. It is meaningless to set the

parameter too large.

If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a small

number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell are in idle

state;

If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a large

number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot meet the

requirements.

The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore,

the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3

match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).

None

HRH3

amrConfigurationHr:

hysteresis3

None

HRH2

amrConfigurationHr:

hysteresis2

None

HRH1

amrConfigurationHr:

hysteresis1

None

HRTD3

None

HRTD2

None

HRTD1

None

HRH3

None

HRH2

None

HRH1

None

HRTU3

None

HRTU2

None

HRTU1

Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS.

The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40 kbit/s to 4.75

kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is

contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not

contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected

simultaneously.

If only one coding rate is specified by this parameter, then the

parameter AMR Starting Mode (H) must be set to 0, which means

the lowest coding rate. All AMR coding rate adjustment

thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H)

are meaningless.

If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR

Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL

Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H), AMR

DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H)

are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds (H)

and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H) are meaningless.

If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR

Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, or 2. The parameters AMR

UL Coding Rate adj.th1 (H), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (H),

AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H), and AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst1 (H) are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment

thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment hystereses (H)

are meaningless.

If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR

Starting Mode (H) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR coding

rate adjustment thresholds (H) and AMR coding rate adjustment

hystereses (H) are meaningful.

The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates. Therefore,

the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3. The values 0 to 3

match those of the coding rates of AMR ACS (F/H).

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTD3

None

FRTD2

None

FRTD1

None

FRH3

None

FRH2

None

FRH1

None

FRTU3

None

FRTU2

None

FRTU1

Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the ACS.

The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2 kbit/s to 4.75

kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the coding rate is

contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the coding rate is not

contained in the ACS. One to four coding rates can be selected

simultaneously.

If only one coding full rate is specified by this parameter, then

AMR Starting Mode (F) must be set to 0. All the AMR coding rate

adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningless.

If two coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR

Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0 or 1. The parameters AMR UL

Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR

DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F)

are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds

and hysteresis are meaningless.

If three coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR

Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, or 2. The parameters AMR UL

Coding Rate adj.th1 (F), AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F), AMR

DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F), and AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1 (F)

are meaningful. Other AMR coding rate adjustment thresholds

and hysteresis are meaningless.

If four coding rates are specified by this parameter, then AMR

Starting Mode (F) can be set to 0, 1, 2, or 3. All the AMR coding

rate adjustment thresholds and hysteresis are meaningful.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the call completion rate of

MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is improved. This,

however, increases the load of the BSC.

To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is recommended

that the default value Different Band be used. That is, the

frequency band of the preferentially reassigned channel is

different from what is used in the original assignment.

Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during an

upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this parameter

must be set to No.

If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short

messages.

In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled to

reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission on the

signaling processing rate. For terrestrial transmission, the default

value of this parameter is No.

None

The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B, and 0-

4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for local use in the

network. Priorities 0-4 are used for subscribers all over the world.

If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the support

of the MSC, HLR, MS (including SIM) is required.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC initiates a re-assignment

when receiving an assignment failure message from the Um

interface. This helps to improve the call completion rate and the

QoS of the network. If there are a large number of assignment

failure messages, the BSC initiates many re-assignment

procedures and thus the BSC load increases.

None

None

In a multiple band network, this parameter can be set on the

basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band.

If this parameter is set to 0, the MS reports the measurement

results of six neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at

the bands with the best signal regardless of the band at which the

neighbor cell is located.


result of a neighbor cell known and permitted by the NCC at each

band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell not

included). The MS reports the measurement result of the

neighbor cell at the band serving the current cell in the redundant

position. If the redundant position is still available, the MS reports

the measurement results of other neighboring cells regardless of

the bands at which the neighboring cells are located.


results of two neighbor cell known and permitted by the NCC at

each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell

not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the



the measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of the

bands at which the neighbor cells are located.


results of three neighbor cells known and permitted by the NCC at

each band with the best signal (the band serving the current cell

not included). The MS reports the measurement result of the



the measurement results of other neighbor cells regardless of the

bands at which the neighbor cells are located.

When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are the same and

there is no special requirement on the band, the MBR (Multi Band

Report) is set to 0. When the traffic volumes of multiple bands are

different and the MS is expected to enter a band preferentially,

the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 3. In other cases except the

first two cases, the MBR (Multi Band Report) is set to 1 or 2. For

details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is recommended that this

parameter be set to Yes.

For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network, it is recommended

that this parameter be set to Yes.

If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used, it is recommended

that this parameter be set to Yes.

If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely to be

faulty and therefore call drops occur.

If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts before an

MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource usage is low. This

parameter takes effect on the downlink.

RLT radioLinkTimeout

None

This parameter can be used to control network load based on the

MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the

network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used.

This parameter can be used to control network load based on the

MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from accessing the

network. It is recommended that this parameter be not used.

This parameter should be set as required: In the areas where the

traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set to 4 or 7 to

improve the success rate of MS access. In the cells where

congestion occurs or in the micro cells where the traffic volume is

high, it is recommended this parameter be set to 1.

RET maxNumberRetransmission

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate

of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not obvious.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through rate

of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is not

obvious.

If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment

retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to No,

the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is not sent.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS can be

increased but the BSC load may increase.

None

None

None

T200S SDCCH LAPDm T200

None

None

None

Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the

double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200 parameter.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm N200

parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not send

the LAPDm N200 parameter.

If a BTS does not support this parameter, the parameter should

be set to No. Otherwise, the BTS cannot be initialized.

If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end may

mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data transmission

fails before the transmit end receives a response from the peer

end. If timer N200 is set to a too small value, the number of data

retransmissions is reduced and the success rate of transmission is

reduced.If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the

channels are seized all along when the link is faulty. Thus,

resources are wasted.














































decreased. If T200 and N200 are set to too great values, the



Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to the

actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS access level.

RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than RACH Min.Access

Level.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable error for

the random access signal is high and an MS can easily access the

network. But the error report rate is high. If this parameter is set

to a too great value, the error report rate of the MS is low but the

MS cannot easily access the network.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding

function.

BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal TRX in

this cell.

BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions after

the originally configured BCCH TRX is recovered.

Baseband FH aiding: When the TRX involved in baseband FH in

the cell is faulty or BCCH aiding is performed in the cell, baseband

FH aiding occurs and the cell is initialized as a non-hopping cell.

Baseband FH aiding switchback: When all the TRXs involved in

baseband hopping in the cell are recovered and the originally

configured BCCH TRX is normal, baseband FH aiding switchback

can be performed and the cell is restored to the baseband FH

mode.

After TRX aiding (BCCH aiding or baseband FH aiding) or

switchback occurs, the cell is re-initialized.

All types of BTSs will not perform the aiding function within 15

minutes after the default cell is initialized (you can configure the

BTSs in this period).

None

The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities. Under

the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a

low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If the AMR function

is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode

can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

AHRLT

AMR HR Radio Link Timeout




is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR Radio

Link Timeout(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding mode can be

a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

ARLT

AMR Radio Link Timeout




is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AHR

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding

mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.


the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding supports a


is enabled, the speech quality is improved. The value of AFR

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period (480ms)) in AMR coding

mode can be a little more than that in non-AMR coding mode.

If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with heavy

loads are selected as candidate target cells so that the handover

does not make sense. If the value of the parameter is too low, it is

difficult to select candidate target cells.DRT drThreshold

None

Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging success

rate. If this parameter is set to a too great value, congestion may

occur.

For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter must

be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of the BTS and

the minimum access level of the MS to ensure the balance

between the uplink and the downlink. This parameter also affects

handover access of RACH BURST during asynchronous handover.

For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter

does not affect MS access but affects the reporting of

CCCH_LOAD_IND. If the level received by the BCCH on the

network side is greater than the RACH Busy Threshold, the

CCCH_LOAD_IND is counted once whether the decoding is

successful. The RACH whose level is lower than the RACH Busy

Threshold and whose decoding is successful is also counted. The

measurement period is the Average RACH Load Timeslot Number.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS easily

considers that the RACH timeslot is busy and reports overload

messages to the BSC. If the value is too great, the BTS cannot

determine the status of the RACH timeslot correctly.

For the BTS24, if this parameter is used to determine busy

timeslot, its setting is consistent with that in the BTS30. If this

parameter is the level threshold for valid random access, its

setting is consistent with that in the BTS20.

The settings of the BTS312, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, BTS3002C,

and double-transceiver BTS must be consistent with the meaning

and requirement of the BTS30.

If the value of this parameter does not match with the value

supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated.

The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four TDMA

frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If the value of

T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the BTS needs to

retransmit the physical information to the MS when the timer

T3105 expires for the first time.If the transmission of the physical

information over the FACCH is not complete, the expiration is

invalid because the time is shorter than an FACCH

period.Considering the previous factors, 20 ms is the reasonable

minimum value for this parameter. At present, the default value

of this parameter is 70 ms.T3105

The value of this parameter can be increased when handover

becomes slow or the handover success rate decreases because of

clock problems or poor transmission.An MS can be handed over

only when Max Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link

Timeout is greater than the interval between EST IND and HO

DETECT (120-180 ms). Otherwise, the handover fails.

NY1 maxNumberOfRepetitions

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load in the

UL subcell is increased.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load

is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load

is increased.

None

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow load

is increased.

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow load

is increased.

The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult

the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be

triggered.


the handover between the OL subcell and the UL subcell can be

triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load

balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is adversely

affected.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load in the



OL subcell is increased.





None

None





This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is

applied.

None

None

None

None


UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.


UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share the traffic.

This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or

equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.









When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no penalty

related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is imposed.

That is, the call can still be handed over to the previous target cell

after the penalty time.

None

None

This parameter is valid only when the Enhanced Concentric

Allowed parameter is set to Yes.





None

This parameter is valid in an enhanced concentric cell.


For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC

handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells.

Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is Underlaid

Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example, 900/1800 MHz

cells), incoming BSC handovers occur frequently and are generally

not triggered at the edges of adjacent cells. In this case, the

recommended value of this parameter is Overlaid Subcell. In the

case that success rate of handovers drops, UL Subcell is preferred

for incoming BSC handovers.

None

None

None

When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH in the

OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the MS because no

TA is lower than this threshold. In this case, Assign Optimum

Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.

None

None


the concentric cell handover can be triggered.


the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced concentric cell.

The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell is

determined by different factors.

#N/A

None










None

None

None

None

None

None

None

Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the

candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level based

on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking of candidate

cells. Generally, it is set to 0.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may easily

occur.

Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not located at

the fourth layer.

None

This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX Times,

determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.

This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover for a

certain period.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell

handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too great

value, the system resources may be wasted when intra-cell

handovers occur frequently.

When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this

parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the

difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be

triggered.

The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the

fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered.

The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult the

fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system traffic

volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this parameter is set to a

too small value, the judgment on whether the MS fast passes a

cell may be incorrect.

The setting of this parameter affects the width of the handover

strip during load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover time. If it

is set to a too greater value, the handover time of each level is

long.

The setting of this parameter determines the maximum width of

the handover strip during load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover targeted

to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number of handover

requests that are rejected increases.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the load

handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of load

handovers increases.

The value of this parameter should not be set too high. Load

handover is allowed only when the system flow is lower than the

setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the load on the system is

increased.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of BQ

handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the

uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QURH

amrHoHrThrUlRxQual


handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the

downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDRH

amrHoHrThrDlRxQual


handover of AMR FR calls. If it is set to a too small value, the

uplink BQ handover is easily triggered. QURF

amrHoFrThrUlRxQual



downlink BQ handover is easily triggered. QDRF

amrHoFrThrDlRxQual

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is

used in interference handover decision. An uplink interference

handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to a small

value.

This parameter is used in handover decision. An uplink

interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is set to

a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.



a too small value.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the

downlink measurement report is greater than the value of this

parameter, the handover decision related to no downlink

measurement report is not performed. Therefore, if this

parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink measurement

report handover cannot be triggered.

The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink receive

quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter.

Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher value, the no

downlink measurement report handover cannot be triggered.

This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop

is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.

Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following requirement:

A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80. The settings of A1 to

A8 reflect the number of MRs in which the receive level drops

rapidly.




rapidly.




rapidly.




rapidly.




rapidly.




rapidly.




rapidly.




rapidly.


handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the uplink

BQ handover is easily triggered.

QUR hoThresholdsQualUL


handover of non-AMR calls. If it is set to a lower value, the

downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.

QDR hoThresholdsQualDL

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA

emergency handover. In the areas with small space between BTSs

and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of the cell can be

reduced if this parameter is set to a lower value.

When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement report

indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values should be

selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement

report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET values should be

selected. In latter cases, the SUBSET values should be used

irrespective of how DTX is indicated in the subsequent

measurement reports.

When this parameter is set to 1, whether the FULLSET values or

the SUBSET values should be selected depends on the DTX

indication bit in the measurement report. That is, if the

measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the SUBSET

values should be selected; otherwise, the FULLSET values should

be selected.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell for the

previous handover will not be selected for the next handover, but

the probability of call drop increases. If this parameter is set to a

too small value, the probability of handover failure increases.









If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered value is

more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this parameter is

set to a too small value, the filtered value is inaccurate. Once set,

this parameter should not be modified.



MS.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty

time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR

handover becomes more difficult.







MS.







MS.







MS.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to be

handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to ping-pong

handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS is

unlikely to be handed over to the original serving cell.













This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a target

cell. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to avoid further

attempts when a handover fails due to any of the following

reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating internal handover

refusal is received, a message indicating Um interface handover

failure is received during out-going BSC handover, or a message

indicating Um interface handover failure is received during

internal handover. This parameter is valid only within the

duration of the cell penalty time.




When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the impact of





MS.



MS.




This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused

by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.




Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the signal

strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number of

consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of this

parameter, all previous measurement reports are discarded and

the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei recommends that this

parameter be set to a great value for emergency handovers.

If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or equal to

the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can be selected as a

candidate cell for directed retry.

This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate and

flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is sent at a

high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is increased.

When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance

measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is set to

No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT handovers, load

handovers, and concentric cell handovers) that require power

compensation may fail.

In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two timeslots

configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this parameter should be set

to No.

When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC preprocesses the

measurement reports. In this case, the Transfer Original MR,

Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR

parameters are invalid.

When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis

interface and the load of the BSC are reduced. Thus, the response

time is shortened and the network performance is improved.

When setting this parameter, you should determine whether the

BTS supports the configured power control algorithms.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the maximum

transmit power, and thus the handover success rate is decreased,

but the network interference is reduced.POPT msPwrOptLev

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If you

need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set the related

penalty time and penalty level to 0.

This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH

handover is allowed.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers

cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value,

handovers cannot be performed timely.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent handovers

cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a too great value,

handovers cannot be performed timely.

This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to

inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial phase of

call establishment.

If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can

set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement Reports

smaller than the report frequency of the measurement reports

from the MS. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for

SDCCH HOs be set to a small value.

If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the

frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC side is

greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is recommended

that Min Interval for SDCCH HOs be set to a great value.

This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers due to

inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase of call

establishment.

If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you can

set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed Measurement Reports

smaller than the report frequency of the measurement reports

from the MS. Therefore, it is recommended that Min Interval for

TCH HOs be set to a small value.

If measurement reports are processed on the BSC side, the

frequency of receiving measurement reports on the BSC side is

greater than that on the BTS side. Therefore, it is recommended

that Min Interval for TCH HOs be set to a great value.

None

According to the P/N criterion, if the load of a non-BCCH

frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO,

the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL

Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is

handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs

on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for other calls. This

ensures the call performance of other calls.


frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO,

the MS with conversation quality higher than the RX_QUAL

Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the cell edge is

handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency. Thus, the TCHs

on non-BCCH frequencies are reserved for other calls. This

ensures the call performance of other calls.

None

The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more difficult the

AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover can be triggered.


the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover can be triggered.


the AMR handover can be triggered.


the AMR handover can be triggered.

The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell F-H

HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

1. This parameter must be properly set because it limits the

number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great

value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate

cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted

cell may become the candidate cell. This leads to handover

failures or call drops.

2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the receive level

minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access level

offset.


number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too great

value, some desired cells may be excluded from the candidate

cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value, an unwanted

cell may become the target cell. This leads to handover failures or

call drops.

2. A cell can become a candidate cell only when the uplink receive

level minus this parameter is greater than the minimum access

level offset.

None

Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the priority

of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer HO

Threshold.

If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO

Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based on receive

level. The cell takes a low priority for handovers.

None

ISHO


the PBGT handover can be triggered.


the PBGT handover can be triggered.


the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.


the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.


the edge handover can be triggered.







This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO DL

RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily

occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge

handover threshold can be decreased.

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge HO UL

RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call drop may easily

occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant edge

handover threshold can be decreased.

None

None

None

None

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In other

words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled.

The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower the

hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered hierarchical

handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell has the highest

priority in the queue or if the level of the target cell is lower than

the Inter-layer HO Threshold.

If this parameter is set to Yes, a call is handed over to the target

cell that has a higher priority than the serving cell.

Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be

enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce cross

coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and adjacent

channel interference.

EPB enablePwrBudgetHandover

In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban

areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The

propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater than

the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band. Considering

the preceding factors, you can enable the Rx_Level_Drop HO

Allowed for the DCS1800 cell.

Under normal conditions, this parameter is set to No. To support

the rapid level drop handover, the BSC must have the original MR.

It is recommended that this handover be applied only in special

areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving

micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used only in special

conditions.FMT fastMovingThreshold

If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be

introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is used.

TRHO trhoTargetLevel

Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas, common

urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for high-speed

circumstances

When the authentication and ciphering procedures are enabled

on the existing network, this parameter can be set to Yes.ESD enableSDCCHHandover

If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the MS is

handed over may not be the cell with the best signal quality.

None

PET penaltyTime

None

TEO temporaryOffset

None

The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should guarantee

that cells with same priority have the same cell reselect offset.

The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the system.

QUA cellBarQualify

The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum

interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and C2

value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS constantly

checks whether a cell reselection is required by referring to

following conditions:

Whether the path loss (C1) of the current serving cell drops below

0 within 5s.If yes, the path loss is too large.

C2 of an appropriate non-serving cell exceeds that of the serving

cell in 5s and the following conditions are met:

system information 3 and 4 of the serving cell) exceeds C2 of the

serving cell in 5s.

A cell reselection is performed in the last 15s, and the C2 of the

new cell minus 5 dB constantly exceeds the C2 of the serving cell

in 5s.

A better cell exists if the above conditions are met.If a better cell

exists, the MS reselects a cell,and does not go to the previous cell

within 5s.

PI cellReselectParamInd

An MS does not respond to pagings during location update. Thus,

the connection rate drops if cell reselection is performed.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong location

updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH increases.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the cell that the MS

camps on for a long time may not be the best after the LA

changes.HYS cellReselectHysteresis

It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as 16, 20,

or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller value, such as 2

or 3, in the area with light traffic.

To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is necessary to

perform overall and long-term measurement on the entities

involved regarding their processing capability and traffic, such as

the processing capability of the MSC and BSC, and the load on the

A interface, Abis interface, Um interface, HLR, and VLR.

The location update period in the MSC must be greater than that

in the BSC.

In the GSM system, it is possible that a powered-on MS is

identified as implicit off-line if the MS sends no location update

request within a long period.

When the MS reselects another cell (in the same LAC), the MS is

restarted through T3212 timeout if the T3212 of the new cell

differs from that of the original cell.

When this parameter differs in the cells of the same LAC, it is

possible that the MS is identified as implicit off-line if the MS

sends no location update request for a long period. In this case,

system plays "The subscriber you dial is power off." even though

the called MS is on.

In an LAC, the value of this parameter should be the same in all

cells.

PER timerPeriodicUpdateMS

The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of paging

sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of MSs on each

paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter larger can prolong the

average service life of MS batteries but increase the delay of

paging messages and reduce the system performance.

MFR

noOfMultiframesBetweenPagin

g

None

AG noOfBlocksForAccessGrant

The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with the

NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too many call

drops.

PLMN plmnPermitted

The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this parameter is

set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0, only handovers are

allowed in a cell, and direct access of an MS is not allowed. This

condition applies to a dual-network coverage cell. For a common

cell, this parameter should be set to 0.

The value of CBA affects the network access of an MS.

BAR cellBarred

If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T should be set

to a great value. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is large,

T should be set to a small value. The increase in T and S prolongs

the access time of an MS, thus affecting the access performance

of the whole network. Therefore, appropriate values should be

selected for T and S.

When the network traffic is heavy, the success rate of immediate

assignment is low if the sum of S and T is low. Thus, the value of T

should be properly adjusted to make the sum of S and T great.

When Abis interface use the satellite transmission,this parameter

must be 32.

None

ATT allowIMSIAttachDetach

None

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the channel

resources and cause the congestion.





If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the

handover success rate.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the channel

load and influence the access success rate.

T3122

If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio resources

too much, and influences the channel resource utilization.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may influence the call

reestablishment success rate.



T3111


resources and cause the congestion.T3109




handover success rate. T8








assignment success rate. T3107














immediate assignment success rate.

T3101

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intra-cell

handover.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is

performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the synchronous

handover is performed.

If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be made

in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too large, a faulty

main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering of TRX aiding

function after cell initialization.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the BSC initiates cell

flow control when receiving the RACH overload message from the

BTS. That is, the minimum receive level of MSs is increased to

reduce RACH access requests.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends the

overload message to the BSC when a large number of MSs access

the network. In this case, system failure may occur.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth is

occupied by services.

The higher the value of this parameter is, the larger the

proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value of the

major service should be smaller than that of the minor service. It

is recommended that the default value be used.













None

None

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently

sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus, the system

resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot access the

network.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends an

overload message to the BSC with a long interval. Thus, system

faults may occur.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS frequently

reports overload indication messages to the BSC. As a result, the

BSC frequently reports overload indication messages to the MSC

and thus the MSC may initiate flow control. If the value of this

parameter is too great, the BTS sends overload indication

messages to the BSC only when a large number of MSs access the

network and when the system resources are insufficient.

Therefore, the access requests on the RACH and all the messages

on the PCH are discarded.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling traffic on

the Abis interface increases and thus the load of the BSC

increases. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BSC

cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in time.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource status is

reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is increased. If

this parameter is set to a too great value, RF resource status is not

updated in time. Therefore, the BSC cannot handle the

interference in the BTS in time.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource

indication messages are reported frequently and thus the load of

the BSC is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource status

is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot handle the

interference in the BTS in time.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.

None

If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.

None

For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this

parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power reduces

too much. If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS

power reduces less and the power reduction effect is not good.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result

cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this parameter

is too small, the averaging is performed too frequently and


None

BO5 interferenceAveragingProcess

None


None


None


None


None


None

None

None

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the BTS

transmits at full power increases. The interference increases. The

handover success rate, however, is increased to some extent.

For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.

For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs (O2 or

S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The RF

connection supports the configuration of the main and diversity

antennas. This parameter is configured for only the BTS3002C.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power

adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

None

None

None

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm cannot

realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a higher

value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be guaranteed.







If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor

without power control. Thus, the conversation quality is

degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power control.

Thus, the battery life is reduced.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is good

without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced and the

network interference is increased. If this parameter is set to a too

great value, the quality is poor without power control, thus the

conversation quality is degraded.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the uplink level

becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life is

reduced and the network interference is increased. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level becomes

low, and call drop may easily occur.






If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor


degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality

is good without power control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.









parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level becomes







The value of this parameter is equal to that of the UL Expected

Level at HO Access.

None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently

received measurement reports in the measurement report

compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit

power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the

measurement report.

On receiving some consecutive measurement reports, the

network calculates the average value of the downlink signal

quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the

BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the

delay and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of



network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality.

This average value indicates the radio environment of the MS.

When you configure this parameter, you must consider the delay

and accuracy of the average value caused by the number of




levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the





network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels.





If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control

may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the

power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the

resources.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic power


None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm cannot

realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to a too great

















None

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the currently

received measurement reports in the measurement report

compensation queue and then records the change of the transmit

power based on the MS power and the BTS power in the

measurement report.



quality. This average value indicates the radio environment of the

MS. When you configure this parameter, you must consider the


measurement reports. QDS

pcAveragingQualDL / windows

size


network calculates the average value of the uplink signal quality.




measurement reports. QUS

pcAveragingQualUL / windows

size



levels. This average value indicates the radio environment of the



measurement reports. LDS

pcAveragingLevDL / windows

size


network calculates the average value of the uplink signal levels.




measurement reports. LUS

pcAveragingLevUL / windows

size

None





LDR

PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx

Qual





UDR

PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx

Qual





low, and call drop may easily occur. LDR

PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx

Level





low, and call drop may easily occur. UDR

PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx

Level

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal quality of

the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the conversation

quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value,

the signal quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery

life is reduced.

LUR

PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx

Qual






UUR

PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx

Qual





low, and call drop may easily occur. LUR

PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx

Level






The value of this parameter is equal to that of UL Expected Level

at HO Access. UUR

PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx

Level

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power control

may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the

power control may be performed frequently, thus wasting the

resources. INT powerControlInterval

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the

history value in the interference measurement results decreases;

if this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of the

history value in the interference measurement results increases.

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on

Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the

influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-1 on

Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the

influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power of the

MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the output

power of the MS increases.

None

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the tolerance of the

network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of the

frequent TBF release increases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may

occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of current

cell in the network caused by the MS activities, and the network

still assigns the radio resources to the MS), the network cannot

release this TBF, thus wasting the network resources.

Based on the actual condition of existing network (for example,

the N3105 overflow caused by the bad Um interface quality, the

unstable transmission link quality, and the MS activities), you

should properly adjust this parameter to ensure the downlink TBF

does not abnormally release due to the frequent overflow of the

N3105.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal uplink TBF

release increases caused by the overflow of the N3103.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of the

uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused by the bad

Um interface quality, thus occupying the link resources of system.




should properly adjust this parameter to ensure the uplink TBF


N3101.


network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of the

frequent TBF release increases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF may

occur (such as the MS has not received the message of current

cell in the network caused by the MS activities, the network still

assigns the uplink resources to the MS), the network cannot

release this TBF, thus wasting the network resources.




should properly adjust this parameter to ensure the uplink TBF


N3101.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, this wastes the wireless

resources and influences the the access performance of other

MSs in the network, thus causing the useless signaling seizing the

channel bandwidth and wasting the downlink resources.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF frequently

releases and establishes, thus increasing the delay for the delay

tests of the Attach and Ping services. The original downlink TBF is

released immediately and cannot be used to transmit subsequent

downlink data. Therefore, a new TBF must be established. The

original downlink TBF also cannot be used for a new requirement

of uplink data transmission. Therefore, the duration and success

rate of the TBF establishment are greatly affected.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release delay of the

uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the uplink resources.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF frequently

releases and establishes, thus increasing the delay for the delay

tests of the Attach and Ping services. The most optimized value

should be a little greater than the interval between two

discontinuous uplink transmissions.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, this can increase the

probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH, thus

greatly reducing the downlink TBF establishment time; however,

if the MS needs to send new uplink data, because the BSC6000

does not support the uplink establishment function on the uplink

at present, the reserved uplink TBF must be released and a new

TBF must be established to transmit the new data. Therefore, the

overall transmission performance decreases.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, this can decrease the

probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the PACCH. The

downlink TBF must establish on the CCCH, thus increasing the

establishment time.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the load-based

reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a

lower value, the load-based reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of times that

the transmission quality is worsened decreases, and the critical


lower value, the number of times that the transmission quality is

worsened increases, and the critical reselection is triggered easily.











If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell

reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value,

the number of cell reselections decreases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of the cell

reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the

probability of the cell reselection decreases.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of decision

may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher value, the

decision may not be performed immediately.

None

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the

previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a lower

value, the weight of current signal level increases.

None

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the MS to

reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it is

difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to trigger the

load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to a lower value, it

is easier to trigger the load-based reselection.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is

triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the

critical reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical reselection is

triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the

critical reselection is triggered easily.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be

handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection fails

or the load-based reselection occurs within the time longer than

this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.

If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be handed

over to the target cell only if the target cell has a higher level;

conversely, the MS can be handed over to the target cell only if

the target cell has a lower level.

The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong reselection

between cells.

NoneSL rxLevMinCell

None

This parameter is configured according to the congestion of the

underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the underlaid

voice services are congested, the overlaid-to-underlaid subcell

handover is only allowed; if the overlaid voice services are

congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid handover is only allowed.

None

None

None

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS

reduces.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the MS

reduces.

None

For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the parameter

to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface quality, set the

parameter to MCS4.

None

None

None


proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is;

otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history

information sent by the MS is.

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to decrease

the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is hard to

decrease the CS type.







If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to increase


increase the CS type.







None

None



















None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of services

occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to a modest

value, this kind of services occupies low bandwidth.



















If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis

timeslots cannot be fully used.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots may

be applied frequently.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services are

affected.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services are

affected when there are too many PS services.

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic channel

resources may be wasted when there are no services for a long

time.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a

dynamic channel is requested immediately after being released.

Therefore, the dynamic channel request is sent frequently.

This parameter is configured according to the congestion counter

of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services.

If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is

converted at the UL cell.

If the OL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is

converted at the OL cell.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs established on

the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the downlink

bandwidth for each subscriber is higher.

If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on

the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the downlink

bandwidth for each subscriber is lower.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs established on

the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and the uplink

bandwidth for each subscriber is higher

If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established on

the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink

bandwidth for each subscriber is lower.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels.

If this threshold is low, it is easy to seize dynamic channels.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic channels.


If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are excessive

PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS services.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are insufficient

PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS services.

None

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult for the

cell to be selected.

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for the cell

to be selected.

If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell during

cell reselection.

If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this cell

during cell reselection.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power

consumption and radiation of the MS are high.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not be able

to access the channel.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage area of

the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may not be able to

access the system.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area of

the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases.

None

None

In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an excessive

value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a

modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period when cell

reselection is prohibited increases.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when cell

reselection is prohibited decreases.

None

None

None

In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an excessive

value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this parameter is set to a

modest value, the frequent ping-pong reselection occurs.

None

None

None

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for an

MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be wasted.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an MS to

access the cell. However, too many MSs may access the cell.

Therefore, the system may be overloaded.
















If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS sends a new

Channel Request within a long interval after the channel request

fails, thus reducing access collisions but slowing down the MS

access speed.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a new

Channel Request within a short interval after the channel request

fails, thus accelerating the MS access speed but adding access

collisions.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS needs to

wait for a long time before sending the next request. This may

affect MS services.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that a

response is sent, but the MS has not received it because of

transmission delay. In this case, the MS also resends the access

request.

None

None

None

None

None

None

PRB bsPRACHBlocks

None

None

PBB bsPBCCHBlocks

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information

may be missing.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the reselection

measurement report is sent frequently. This occupies many

bandwidth resources.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some information

may be missing.




The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after

the measurement report is sent.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may stay in

non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be affected.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS enters the DRX

mode and may send the measurement report frequently.

The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows:

1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage, Huawei

recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value range 0-20 dB is

recommended.

2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended.

If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell, this

parameter should be set to a high value when the coverage area

of the micro cell is large. GPET gprsPenaltyTime

None

GTEO gprsTemporaryOffset

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension

measurement report is sent frequently.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement

information is not obtained timely.

None

None

None

None

None

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the EGPRS

MS is shortened.

None

None

None

None

When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing the

parameter value improves the transmission rate.

When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing the

parameter value reduces the times of abnormally releasing TBFs.

PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually, PAN_INC = 2

x PAN_DEC.

However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.

None

If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS

may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC sends an

Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many radio resources

are not used but occupied.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of the

sliding window decreases and the probability of the uplink TBF

transmission countdown increases, thus decreasing the

performance of uplink transmission.

To make this value more accurate, you need to estimate the delay

in the transmission between the MS and the BSC6 first. This value

is set based on the transmission delay.

None

Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst. Therefore, 8bit

is recommended.

It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment

message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in DRX

mode. During the period of non-DRX mode, the TBF

establishment time decreases, but the power consumption of the

MS increases.

In DRX mode, the MS monitors paging messages only on the

home paging group, and then receives the Immediate Assignment

message on all the paging blocks and AGCH reservation blocks.

The TBF establishment time increases, but the power

consumption of the MS decreases.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the TBF establishment

time increases but the power consumption of the MS decreases.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the TBF

establishment time decreases but the power consumption of the

MS increases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources

(including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If no

downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not used but

occupied for a long time.

If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the TBF

resources within a shorter period. However, if the network sends

new downlink PDU data packets, the network must initiate a

paging or immediate assignment procedure. Therefore, the

downlink TBF establishment takes a longer period.

If the download data packets from the network are not received

and T3192 does not expire, the network directly sends a Packet

Downlink Assignment message to establish a new downlink TBF,

thus shortening the TBF establishment time.

On one hand, the value of the T3192 timer depends on the

average transmission interval between two successive downlink

data.

On the other hand, you need to comprehensively analyze the

traffic models of the cell and take the service load of the cell into

consideration. When network resources are sufficient, that is the

GPRS congestion rate is low, the T3192 should be set to a large

value, shortening the time to establish new TBFs and improving

data transmission rate.

T3192

If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the TBF

establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF

establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is short,

but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad radio

environment decreases. In addition, the small timer value

increases the probability of the retransmission of the packet

access request, thus increasing the probability of reassignment by

the PCU and wasting system resources.

If the timer is set to a higher value, the MS takes a longer period

to detect the TBF establishment failure. If the TBF establishment

fails, the average delay of packet access is long, but the success

rate of TBF establishment in bad radio environment increases.

T3168

Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs

interface or the PCCCH. Therefore, Network Operation Mode II is

selected by default.

Unit Step Size Default Value Range

GSM 900 (0)

GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800

(1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM

800 (5)

3 characters

2...3 characters

1 0...7

Obligatory in creation

when LCSE not

connected to any

segment, otherwise read

from RNW db. 0…7

N NoYes

N Y/N

GSM 900 (0)

GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800

(1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM

800 (5)

255 0…255

No No/BB/RF

TA 255 0...255

TA 255

2 0...2

N Yes/No

dBm -105 -110...-47

N Yes/No

Y Yes/No

1 1...16

F

- 1…65535

1...10 characters

Locked (3)

N Y/N

TA 255 0...255

N Yes/No

dBm -105 -110...-47

N Yes/No

2 0...2

0 0...63/N

0 0...2

0.5dB 0 0…15

0.5dB 2 0…15

0.5dB 2 0…15

SACCH 4 20 4...64

4 1, 2, 4 or 7

dBm -100 -110…-47

5 5...35

4 0...7

4 0...7

dBm N -110... -47/ N

Yes Yes/No

SACCH 0 0...255

dBm N -109... -47/ N

N Yes/No

sec 20 20 20...640

dB 10 0 0...70

N Y/N

N Y/N

dB 4 0...14

hours 0.5 0 / 0.1...25.5

4 2...9

1 0...7

NCC 0…7

N Yes/No

Y Yes/No

dBm -47 -47…FIXED

dBm -90 -110...-47

dBm -95 -110...-47

dBm -100 -110...-47

dBm -105 -110...-47

dBm -110 -110…FIXED

SACCH 1 1...32

SACCH 1 1...32

SACCH 4 1...32

SACCH 4 1...32

sec 2 0...31

dBm -100 -110...-47

6 0…12

3 1…4

sec 10s 10 10…320

dB 0 0…70

Parameter Name Old ValueProposed

ValueRemarks Unit

UL DTX Shall Use Shall Use

Call Reestablishment Forbidden NA Yes None

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN 0 1

Not

matched

with other

vendor

TCH Immediate Assignment No No

Direct Retry Yes Yes

UL PC Allowed No Yes None

DL PC Allowed No Yes None

Encryption Algorithm NA<1000000

0>None

DL DTX NA No

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

None

MAX TA(bit period(1 bit=0.55km)) 63 Bit Period

Allow Dynamic Shutdown of TRX

Power AmplifierNA NO

Allow Dynamic Voltage Adjustment NA NO

ATT Yes Yes

Tx-integer(RACH Timeslot(equals to a

TDMA frame,4.615ms))NA

20 (32

Satelite

Cells)Cell_Bar_Access NA 0

NCC Permitted NA 255

BS_AG_BLKS_RES NA 1

BS-PA-MFRAMS

4

Multiframe

Period

4

Multiframe

Period

Period of Periodic Location Update(6

minutes)NA 40

Ericsson

60

CRH 6dB 6dB

PI Yes Yes

Cell_Bar_Qualify 0 0

CRO(2dB) 0 0

ACS No No

TO 0 0

PT(s) NA 0

SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH period

(480ms))24 24

Need to

standerdiz

e

RACH Busy Threshold 5 16

To identify

MS request

at -94 dBm

or worst

coverage

Paging Times 1 1

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable NA Disable

Directed Retry Load Access Threshold NA

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

Speech Version NA 47

TRX Aiding Function Control NA

Allowed &

Recover

When

Check

Res.

None

Random Access Error Threshold NA 200

RACH Min.Access Level 0 1

T200 SDCCH(5ms) 60 60

T200 FACCH/F(5ms) 50 50

T200 FACCH/H(5ms) 50 50

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI0(10ms) 150 150

T200 SACCH TCH SAPI3(10ms) 200 200

T200 SACCH SDCCH(10ms) 60 60

T200 SDCCH SAPI3(5ms) 60 60

Use LAPDm N200 No No

N200 of Establish 5 5

N200 of Release 5 5

N200 of SACCH 5 5

N200 of SDCCH 23 23

N200 of FACCH/Half rate 29 29

N200 of FACCH/Full rate 34 34

Use Imm_Ass Retransmit Parameter No No

Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit(ms) NA 4

Max Transmit Times of Imm_Ass NA 2

If use

Imm_Ass

Retrans,

Default

MS MAX Retrans

4 (7 for

Satelite

Site)

4 (7 for

Satelite

Site)

Common Access Control ClassNot

selected

Not

selected

Special Access Control ClassNot

selected

Not

selected

Emergent Call Disable NA No

Radio Link Timeout(SACCH period

(480ms))20 24

All vendor

same

platform

ECSC Yes Yes

MBR

0(for

normal

cell);

2(near to

Dualband

cell)

0(for

normal

cell);

2(near to

Dualband

cell)

Power Deviation Indication Yes Yes

Power Deviation(2dB) 1 1

Serving Band Reporting NA NA3G

Parameter

Qsearch I NA NA3G

Parameter

Qsearch C Initial NA NA3G

Parameter

FDD Q Offset NA NA3G

Parameter

FDD REP QUANT NA NA3G

Parameter

FDD MULTIRAT Reporting NA NA3G

Parameter

FDD Qmin NA NA3G

Parameter

Qsearch P NA NA3G

Parameter

3G Search PRIO NA NA3G

Parameter

Invalid BSIC Reporting NA NA3G

Parameter

Scale Order NA NA3G

Parameter

Qsearch C NA NA3G

Parameter

900 Reporting Offset NA NA3G

Parameter

900 Reporting Threshold NA NA3G

Parameter

1800 Reporting Offset NA NA3G

Parameter

1800 Reporting Threshold NA NA3G

Parameter

FDD Reporting Offset NA NA3G

Parameter

FDD Reporting Threshold NA NA3G

Parameter

Allow Reassign No No

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

Allow EMLPP No No

Immediate Assignment Opt. NA NO

Short Message Uplink Disabled No No

Short Message Downlink Disabled No No

Frequency Band of Reassign NoSame

Band

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

Max Assignment Retry Times NA 2

AMR ACS(F) NA 165

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(F) NA 12



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(F) NA 2



AMR Starting Mode(F) NA 1

AMR ACS(H) NA 15

AMR UL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12



AMR UL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.th1(H) NA 12



AMR DL Coding Rate adj.hyst1(H) NA 2



AMR Starting Mode(H) NA 0

Co-BSC/MSC Adj No No

SDCCH HO Allowed No No

Intracell HO Allowed Yes Yes None

Load HO Allowed No Yes

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

None

MS Fast Moving HO Allowed No No None

Rx_Level_Drop HO Allowed No No None

PBGT HO Allowed Yes Yes

Level HO Allowed NA NO

Fringe HO Allowed NA Yes

BQ HO Allowed NA Yes

TA HO Allowed NA Yes

Concentric Circles HO Allowed NA

Yes (for

MB cell),

No for

othres

Interference HO Allowed NA Yes

Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold 5 15 Grade

Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold 10 20 Grade

Edge HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second

Edge HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second

Layer HO Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second

Layer HO Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second

PBGT Watch Time(s) 5 5 Second

PBGT Valid Time(s) 4 4 Second

Inter-layer HO Threshold NA 25

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis 3 3

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

dB

Min DL Level on Candidate Cell 15 10

Tunable

based on

performan

ce

Grade

Intracell F-H HO Allowed NA Yes

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time(s) NA 5 Second

Intracell F-H HO Last Time(s) NA 4 Second

F2H HO th NA 30

H2F HO th NA 10

Min Interval for TCH HOs NA 4

Min Interval for SDCCH HOs NA 2

Min Interval for Consecutive HOs 6 6 Second

Min Interval for Emerg.HOs NA 2

Inter-BSC SDCCH HO ALLowed NA NO

Penalty Allowed Yes Yes None

MS Power Prediction after HO No No

MR.Preprocessing NA Yes

Transfer Original MR NA NO

Transfer BS/MS Power Class Yes Yes None

Sent Freq.of preprocessed MR NA

Once

Every

Second

Allowed M.R Number Lost NA 4Number of

MR

Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6Number of

MR

Filter Length for TCH Qual NA 6

Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 None

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual NA 3

Filter Length for Ncell RX_LEV 6 6Number of

MR

Filter Length for TA 6 6Number of

MR

Penalty Level after HO Fail NA 30

Penalty Time after HO Fail(s) NA 10

Penalty Level after BQ HO NA 30 dB

Penalty Time after BQ HO(s) NA 10

Penalty Level after TA HO NA 63 dB

Penalty Time after TA HO(s) NA 10

Penalty Time after AMR TCHF-H HO

Fail(s)NA 30

TA Threshold NA 255

DL Qual. Threshold NA 50

UL Qual. Threshold NA 50

UL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40

DL Qual. Threshold for Interf.HO NA 40

UL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 30

DL RX_LEV Threshold for Interf.HO NA 35

Filter Parameter A1 10 10 None








Filter Parameter B 0 0 None

No Dl Mr.HO Allowed NA Yes

No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO Limit NA 60

Cons.No Dl Mr.HO Allowed Limit NA 8

System Flux Threshold for Load HO NA 10

Load HO Threshold NA 5

Load Req.on Candidate Cell NA 2

Load HO Bandwidth NA 25 dB

Load HO Step Period 5 10 Second

Load HO Step Level 5 5 dB

MS Fast-moving Watch Cells NA NA None

MS Fast-moving Valid Cells NA NA None

MS Fast-moving Time Threshold NA 15

MAX Consecutive HO Times NA 3 Times

Forbidden time after MAX Times 20 20 Second

Interval for Consecutive HO Jud. 6 6 Second

Penalty on MS Fast Moving HO NA 30 dB

Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO(s) NA 40

UL Expected Level at HO Access 35 35 Grade

K Bias NA 0

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

UL to OL HO Allowed Yes Yes None

OL to UL HO Allowed Yes Yes None

RX_LEV for UO HO Allowed NA Yes None

RX_QUAL for UO HO Allowed NA Yes None

TA for UO HO Allowed NA No None

UO Signal Intensity Difference NA 0 None

RX_LEV Threshold NA 40 None

RX_LEV Hysteresis NA NA dB

RX_QUAL Threshold NA 50 None

TA Threshold NA 63 Bit Period

TA Hysteresis 0 0 Bit Period

UO HO Watch Time(s) NA 5 Second

UO HO Valid Time(s) NA 4 Second

Assign Optimum Layer

System

optimizatio

n

System

optimizatio

n

None

Assign-optimum-level Threshold NA 35 dBm

TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. NA 63 Bit Period

TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed NA No None

TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref. NA 0 Bit Period

Pref. Subcell in HO of Intra-BSC

System

optimizatio

n

System

optimizatio

n

None

Incoming-to-BSC HO Optimum LayerUnderlaid

subcell

Underlaid

subcellNone

OtoU HO Received Level Threshold NA 20 Grade

UtoO HO Received Level Threshold NA 35 Grade

UtoO Traffic HO Allowed NA Yes None

Traffic Threshold of Underlay NA

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

Underlay HO Step Period(s) NA 5 Second

Underlay HO Step Level NA 5 None

Penalty Time of UtoO HO(s) NA 5 Second

Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail(s) NA 30 Second

Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail(s) NA 5 Second

MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail NA 3 None

Outgoing-RAT HO Allowed NA NA3G

Parameter

Better 3G Cell HO Allowed NA NA3G

Parameter

Inter-RAT HO Preference NA NA3G

Parameter

HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell NA NA3G

Parameter

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA3G

Parameter

Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO NA NA3G

Parameter

3G Better Cell HO Watch Time(s) NA NA3G

Parameter

3G Better Cell HO Valid Time(s) NA NA3G

Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH MEAN_BEP NA NA3G

Parameter

Filter Length for TCH MEAN_BEP NA NA3G

Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH CV_BEP NA NA3G

Parameter

Filter Length for TCH CV_BEP NA NA3G

Parameter

Filter Length for SDCCH REP_QUANT NA NA3G

Parameter

Filter Length for TCH REP_QUANT NA NA3G

Parameter

Max Resend Times of Phy.Info. NA 30 None

T3105(10ms) NA 7 10 ms

PC Interval NA NA

UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 Grade

UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 Grade

UL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade

UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 Grade

DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 Grade

DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade

DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4SACCH

Period

Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA NA

Filter Length for UL Qual. NA 4SACCH

Period

Filter Length for DL Qual. NA NA

MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None

UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1Number of

MR

DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1Number of

MR

MAX Down Adj.Value Qual.Zone 0 NA 6 dB



MAX Down Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 6 dB

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by RX_LEV NA 16 dB

MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 dB

UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 None

UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dB

DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 None

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 dB

BTS PC Class NA 16 Grade

AMR PC Interval NA 3 None

AMR Filter Length for UL RX_LEV NA 4SACCH

Period

AMR Filter Length for DL RX_LEV NA 4SACCH

Period

AMR Filter Length for UL Qual NA 4SACCH

Period

AMR Filter Length for DL Qual. NA 4SACCH

Period

AMR MR. Compensation Allowed NA Yes None

AMR UL MR. Number Predicted NA 1MR

Number

AMR DL MR. Number Predicted NA 1MR

Number

AMR UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 35 Grade

AMR UL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 25 Grade

AMR ULQual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade

AMR UL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

AMR DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold NA 30 Grade

AMR DL RX_LEV Lower Threshold NA 20 Grade

AMR DL Qual. Upper Threshold NA 0 Grade

AMR DL Qual. Lower Threshold NA 4 Grade

AMR MAX Down Adj. Value Qual. Zone

0NA 6 dB


1NA 4 dB


2NA 2 dB

AMR MAX Down Adj. PC Value by

Qual.NA 6 dB

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by

RX_LEVNA 16 dB

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC Value by Qual. NA 8 Grade

AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dB

AMR UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 None

AMR DL Qual Bad Trig Threshold NA 5 dB

AMR DL Qual Bad UpLEVDiff NA 10 None

AMR BTS PC Class NA 16 dB

Idle SDCCH Threshold N1 NA 2 None

Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum 80 80 None

TCH Minimum Recovery Time(s) 60 60 Second

Enhanced TCH Adjust Allowed NA Yes None

Idle TCH Threshold N1 NA

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

Apply-TCH Decision Period T(m) NA 1 Minute

TCH Traffic Busy Threshold(%) NA 50Percentag

e

Interf. Priority Allowed Yes Yes None

Active CH Interf. Meas.Allowed Yes Yes None

Allocation TRX Priority Allowed Yes Yes None

History Record Priority Allowed Yes Yes None

Balance Traffic Allowed Yes Yes None

Interf.of UL Level Threshold NA 30 Grade

Interf.of UL Qual. Threshold NA 50 Grade

Interf.of DL Level Threshold NA 25 Grade

Interf.of DL Qual.Threshold NA 50 Grade

Filter Length for TCH Level 6 6Number of

MR

Filter Length for TCH Qual. 6 6Number of

MR

Filter Length for SDCCH Level 2 2 None

Filter Length for SDCCH Qual. 2 2 None

Updata Period of CH Record(min) NA 30 Minute

Updata Freq.of CH Record NA 2 None

AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed NA Yes

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell Load Threshold NA 2

TCH req suspend interval(s) NA 60 Second

Allow Rate Selection Based on

Overlaid/Underlaid Subcell LoadNA Yes

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in

Overlaid SubcellNA 30

Busy Threshold of TCH Traffic in

Underlaid SubcellNA 30

Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted NA

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

Data service Allowed NA<0110111

000>None

SMCBC DRX NA Yes None

Cell Load0 Threshold NA 20






Cell Load Change Delay NA 3

Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold NA

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

Interf. Band Threshold 0 (-dBm) NA 110






Interf.Calculation Period(SACCH

period(480ms))NA 20

Max RC Power Reduction(2dB) NA

Need to

discuss

with

Huawei

Frame Start Time NA 65535

DC Bias Voltage Threshold NA 3

Power Output Error Threshold NA 2

Power Output Reduction Threshold NA 2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted Threshold NA 2

VSWR TRX Error Threshold NA 2

Radio Resource Report Period(s) NA 10 Second

CCCH Load Indication Period(s) NA 15

CCCH Load Threshold NA 80

Overload Indication Period 15 15

Average RACH Load Timeslot Number NA 5000

Antenna Azimuth Angle(Degree) NA 360

Included Angle(Degree) NA 360

PWRCNot

selectedYes

Discard

BCCH TS

Power

while

calculating

Power

Control in

BBHoppin

g

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH5 (900), 0

(1800)

5 (900), 0

(1800)

Support Half Rate NA Yes

Abis Flow Control Permitted Yes Yes

Aiding Delay Protect Time(min) NA 15 Second

Directly Magnifier Site Flag NA No None

Drop Optimize Error Indication (T200

timeout)NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Error Indication

(unsolicited DM response)NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Error Indication

(sequence error)NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Connection Failure

(radio link fail)NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (HO

access fail)NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Connection Failure (OM

intervention)NA 1 None


(radio resource not available)NA 1 None


(other)NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Release Indication NA 1 None

Drop Optimize ABIS Territorial Link

FailureNA 1 None

Drop Optimize Equipment Failure NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Forced Handover

FailureNA 1 None

Drop Optimize No MR For Long Time NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Resource Check NA 1 None

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc Handover

TimeoutNA 1 None

Drop Optimize Out-Bsc Handover

TimeoutNA 1 None

Drop Optimize Intra-Bsc Out-Cell

Handover TimeoutNA 1 None

Drop Optimize Intra-Cell Handover

TimeoutNA 1 None

Cell Out-of-Service Alarm Switch NA Yes None

T3101(ms) NA 3000 ms

ImmAss A Interf Creation Timer(ms) NA 5000 ms

T3103A(ms) NA 10000 ms

T3103C(ms) NA 10000 ms

T7(ms) NA 10000 ms

T3107(ms) NA 10000 ms

T3121(ms) NA 10000 ms

T8(ms) NA 10000 ms

T3109(ms) NA 27000 ms

T3111(ms) NA 1000 ms

TREESTABLISH(ms) NA 15000 ms

T3122(s) NA 10 ms

Parameters Table Default

Single band

900MHzMultiband

Frequency Band Cell_Common GSM900 GSM900&DCS1800

Administrative State Cell_Common Unlocked Unlocked

Layer of the Cell Cell_Common 3 3 3

MCC Cell_Common 470 470 None

MNC Cell_Common 02 02 None

NCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0

BCC Cell_Common 0~7 0~7 0

Cell Priority Cell_Common Prior-1 Prior-1 Prior-1

Activity Status Cell_Common Activated Activated Activated

PCU Cell_Common 255 255 255

GPRS Support Cell_Common support GPRS support GPRS not support GPRS

Support Baseband FH

and EDGE

simultaneously

Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

Recommended Value

EDGE Support Cell_Common No No No

8PSK power

attenuation gradeCell_Common 0 0 0

Support NACC Cell_Common No No No

Support PACKET SI

STATUSCell_Common No No No

Support NC2 Cell_Common No No No

PCU Support 64

Neighbor CellsCell_Common No No No

Level report switch Cell_Common Support Support Support

Cellband Cell_Common 0 2 0

RAC Cell_Common As per plan As per plan As per plan

Support DTM Cell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support

Support Enhanced

DTMCell_Common Not Support Not Support Not Support

Encryption Algorithm Cell_Common 00000001 00000001 1

FH MODE Cell_CommonAs per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

DL DTX Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1

bit=0.55km))Cell_Common 62 62 62

Cell Extension Type Cell_Common Normal cell Normal cell Normal Cell

Cell Antenna Hopping Cell_Common None None None

Enhanced Concentric

AllowedCell_Common No Yes Yes

Cell Type Cell_Common Normal Cell Concentric Cell Normal cell

Attributes of UL And

OL SubcellsCell_Common NONE NONE NONE

BCCH Concentric

AttributeCell_Common None Underlaid Subcell None

UL DTX Cell_Common Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use

Call Reestablishment

ForbiddenCell_Common Yes Yes Yes

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Cell_Common 1 1 1

TCH Immediate

AssignmentCell_Common No No No

Direct Retry Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

SDCCH Dynamic

Allocation AllowedCell_Common Yes Yes Yes

UL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

DL PC Allowed Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

Allow Dynamic

Shutdown of TRX

Power Amplifier

Cell_Common Yes Yes Yes

Allow Dynamic Voltage

AdjustmentCell_Common Yes Yes Yes

TRX Index TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site65535

TRX No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site255

Cell Index TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

siteNone

Site Index TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site65535

Board Type TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

siteNone

Active State TRx Activated Activated Activated

Abis Mode TRx Auto Auto Auto

Cabinet No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site0

Subrack No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site0

Slot No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

siteNone

TEI TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site0

Out-BSC Subrack No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site0

Out-BSC Slot No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

siteNone

Out-BSC Port No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

siteNone

Out-BSC Timeslot

No.(8K)TRx

Depend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site255

RSL In Site Port No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site255

RSL In Site Timeslot

No.(8K)TRx

Depend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site255

RSL Logic No. TRxDepend on

invidual site

Depend on invidual

site2048

Hop Type TRxAs per frequency

plan

As per frequency

planNone

Power Level TRx 0 0 0

Power Type TRx

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

Default

HW_Concentric

AttributeTRx

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

None

TRX Priority TRx Level0 Level0 Level0

Shut Down Enable TRx Enable Enable Enable

TCH Rate Adjust Allow TRx Yes Yes No

TRX 8PSK Level TRx 0 0 0

Wireless Link Alarm

FlagTRx No No No

Abnormal Release

Statistic BaseTRx 100 100 100

Abnormal Warn

ThresholdTRx 100 100 100

Abnormal Release

ThresholdTRx 50 50 50

Statical Period of No-

traffic(5min)TRx 48 48 48

Wireless Link Alarm

Critical PermitTRx Yes Yes Yes

WLA Prompting

Recover Period(5min)TRx 12 12 12

Begin Time of WLA

Detection(hour)TRx 8 8 8

End Time of WLA

Detection(hour)TRx 22 22 22

Up Down Balance Basic

DifferenceTRx 8 8 8

Up Down Balance

Floating RangeTRx 30 30 30

Up Down Balance

Alarm ThresholdTRx 80 80 80

Receive Mode TRx

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

None

Send Mode TRx

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

Depends on

BTS/site

configuration

None

Allow Shutdown of TRX

Power AmplifierTRx Yes Yes No

Antenna Hopping

IndexTRx No No No

Power Finetune TRx Default Default Default

TRX Antenna Hopping TRx None None None

Reverse Out-BSC Slot

No.TRx 255 255 255

Reverse Out-BSC Port

No.TRx 255 255 255

Reverse Out-BSC

Timeslot No.(8K)TRx 255 255 255

Reverse RSL In Site

Port No.TRx 255 255 255

Reverse RSL In Site

Timeslot No.(8K)TRx 255 255 255

Transmission Type of

Abis InterfaceTRx TDM TDM TDM

Maximum PDCH

numbers of carrierTRx 8 8 8

MaxAbisTSOccupied TRx 32 32 32

Co-TRX for Dynamic

Transmission

Diversity(PBT)

TRx 255 255 255

InHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535

HubHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535

TRXNoInHub TRx 255 255 255

XPUSlotNo TRx 0 0 0

TRX Ability TRx 1 1

PhysicalPassNo TRx 1 1

Priority TRx NONE

QTRU Priority TRx 255 255

RevInHDLCIndex TRx 65535 65535 65535

Time Slot Power

RerserveTRx 0 0 0

Allow Dynamic Voltage

AdjustmentBasic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

Allow Dynamic

Shutdown of TRX

Power Amplifier

Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

MAX TA(bit period(1

bit=0.55km))Basic_Parameter 63 63 62

DL DTX Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

Encryption Algorithm Basic_Parameter 1 1 1

DL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

UL PC Allowed Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

Direct Retry Basic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

TCH Immediate

AssignmentBasic_Parameter No No No

RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN Basic_Parameter 1 1 8

Call Reestablishment

ForbiddenBasic_Parameter Yes Yes Yes

UL DTX Basic_Parameter Shall Use Shall Use Shall Use

GSM900 Band Traffic

Load Share ThresholdCH_MGT 25 25 25

Channel Assignment

Allowed for Insufficient

Power

CH_MGT No No Yes

Qtru Down Link Path

Loss CompensationCH_MGT 4 4 4

Qtru Estimate Bts

PowerCH_MGT 35 35 35

Qtru Down Power

Inadequate Last TimeCH_MGT 3 3 3

Qtru Down Power

Inadequate Stat TimeCH_MGT 5 5 5

Qtru Power Sharing CH_MGT None None None

Observed time of

uplink received level

difference

CH_MGT 5 5 5

Duration of uplink

received level

difference

CH_MGT 4 4 4

Smooth factor of

uplink received levelCH_MGT 6 6 6

Threshold of the

difference between

uplink received levels

CH_MGT 100 100 100

Allow Rate Selection

Based on

Overlaid/Underlaid

Subcell Load

CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

Tch Traffic Busy

Underlay ThresholdCH_MGT 50 50 50

Busy Threshold of TCH

Traffic in Overlaid

Subcell

CH_MGT 50 50 50

Flex HSN Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close

Flex MAIO Switch CH_MGT Close Close Close

Fix Abis Prior Choose

Abis Load Threshold(%)CH_MGT 80 80 80

Flex Abis Prior Choose

Abis Load Threshold(%)CH_MGT 80 80 80

TCH req suspend

interval(s)CH_MGT 60 60 60

AMR TCH/H Prior Cell

Load ThresholdCH_MGT 40 40 40

AMR TCH/H Prior

AllowedCH_MGT As per plan As per plan As per plan

Update Freq.of CH

RecordCH_MGT 2 2 2

Update Period of CH

Record(min)CH_MGT 30 30 30

Filter Length for SDCCH

Qual.CH_MGT 2 2 2


LevelCH_MGT

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

Filter Length for TCH

Qual.CH_MGT Yes Yes 6


LevelCH_MGT 6 6 4

Interf.of DL

Qual.ThresholdCH_MGT 40 40 40

Interf.of DL Level

ThresholdCH_MGT 25 25 25

Interf.of UL Qual.


Interf.of UL Level


History Record Priority

AllowedCH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

Allocation TRX Priority


Active CH Interf.

Meas.AllowedCH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

Interf. Priority Allowed CH_MGT Yes Yes Yes

TCH Traffic Busy

Threshold(%)CH_MGT 1 50 50

TIGHT BCCH Switch CH_MGT No No No

Dynamic Transmission

Diversity(PBT)

Supported

CH_MGT Not Support DPBT Not Support

Channel Allocate

StrategyCH_MGT

Capability

preferredCapability preferred

Capability

preferred

Enhanced TCH Adjust


TCH Minimum

Recovery Time(s)CH_MGT 60 60 60

Cell SDCCH Channel

MaximumCH_MGT 80 80 80

Idle SDCCH Threshold

N1CH_MGT 2 2 2

AMR Starting Mode(H) Call_Control 2 2 2

AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst3(H)Call_Control 10 10 15

AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th3(H)Call_Control 30 30 63

AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR ACS(H) Call_Control 1101 1101 1101

AMR Starting Mode(F) Call_Control 2 2 2

AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.hyst3(F)Call_Control 6 6 3

AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th3(F)Call_Control 38 38 30

AMR DL Coding Rate


AMR DL Coding Rate

adj.th1(F)Call_Control As per plan As per plan As per plan

AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th3(F)Call_Control

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

AMR UL Coding Rate

adj.th2(F)Call_Control Yes Yes 18

AMR UL Coding Rate


AMR ACS(F) Call_Control 11100100 11100100 11100100

Max Assignment Retry

TimesCall_Control 2 2 1

Frequency Band of

ReassignCall_Control Same Band Different Band Different Band

Short Message

Downlink DisabledCall_Control No No No

Immediate Assignment

Opt.Call_Control No No No

Abis Resource

Adjustment TCHH

Function Switch

Call_Control No No No

Allow EMLPP Call_Control No No No

Allow Reassign Call_Control Yes Yes Yes

TDD Cell Threshold Call_Control 1 0 0

TDD Cell offset Call_Control 0 0 0

Best TDD Cell Number Call_Control 1 1 1

TDD Cell Reselect

Diversity(dB)Call_Control 8 8 8

FDD Reporting

ThresholdCall_Control 0 0 0

FDD Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0

1800 Reporting


1800 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0

900 Reporting


900 Reporting Offset Call_Control 0 0 0

Qsearch C Call_Control 15 15 15

Scale Order Call_Control +0dB +0dB +0dB

Invalid BSIC Reporting Call_Control No No No

3G Search PRIO Call_Control Yes Yes Yes

Qsearch P Call_Control 15 15 15

FDD Qmin Call_Control 0 0 0

FDD MULTIRAT

ReportingCall_Control 2 2 2

FDD REP QUANT Call_Control RSCP RSCP RSCP

FDD Q Offset Call_Control 8 8 8

Qsearch C Initial Call_Control Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I Use Qsearch_I

Qsearch I Call_Control 15 15 15

Serving Band Reporting Call_Control 3 3 3

Power Deviation(2dB) Call_Control 1 1 1

Power Deviation

IndicationCall_Control Yes Yes Yes

MBR Call_Control 0 0 0

ECSC Call_Control No Yes NO

Radio Link

Timeout(SACCH period

(480ms))

Call_Control 24 24 52

Emergent Call Disable Call_Control No No No

Special Access Control

ClassCall_Control 00000 00000 00000

Common Access

Control ClassCall_Control 0000000000 0000000000 0000000000

MS MAX Retrans Call_Control 4 Times 4 Times 4 Times

Max Transmit Times of

Imm_AssCall_Control 2 2 2

Max Delay of Imm_Ass

Retransmit(ms)Call_Control 4 4 4

Use Imm_Ass

Retransmit ParameterCall_Control No No No

N200 of FACCH/Full

rateCall_Control 34 34 34

N200 of FACCH/Half

rateCall_Control 29 29 29

N200 of SDCCH Call_Control 23 23 23

N200 of SACCH Call_Control 5 5 5

N200 of Release Call_Control 5 5 5

N200 of Establish Call_Control 5 5 5

Use LAPDm N200 Call_Control No No No

T200 SDCCH

SAPI3(5ms)Call_Control 60 60 60

T200 SACCH

SDCCH(10ms)Call_Control 60 60 60

T200 SACCH TCH


T200 SACCH TCH


T200 FACCH/H(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50

T200 FACCH/F(5ms) Call_Control 50 50 50

T200 SDCCH(5ms) Call_Control 60 60 60

RACH Min.Access

Level(dbm)Call_Control -115 -115 -115

Random Access Error


TRX Aiding Function

ControlCall_Control

Allowed &

Recover When

Check Res

Allowed & Recover

When Check Res

TRX Aiding Not

Allowed

Speech Version Call_Control 11 11 11

AHR Radio Link


(480ms))


AFR Radio Link


(480ms))


AHR SACCH Multi-

Frames(SACCH period

(480ms))


AFR SACCH Multi-

Frames(SACCH period

(480ms))


Directed Retry Load

Access ThresholdCall_Control 75 75 85

Assignment Cell Load

Judge EnableCall_Control Disable Disable Disable

Paging Times Call_Control 2 2 4

RACH Busy Threshold Call_Control 16 16 16

SACCH Multi-

Frames(SACCH period

(480ms))


T3105(10ms) HO 7 7 7

Max Resend Times of

Phy.Info.HO 30 30 30

TDD Better 3G Cell HO

AllowedHO No No 0

TDD 3G Better Cell HO

Valid Time(s)HO 4 4 4

TDD 3G Better Cell HO

Watch Time(s)HO 5 5 5

TDD RSCP Threshold

for Better 3G Cell HOHO 50 50 50

TDD HO Preference

Threshold for 2G CellHO 25 25 25

TDD Inter-RAT HO

PreferenceHO

Preference for 2G

Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G

Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G

Cell By Threshold

Quick Handover

Offset(dB)HO 68 68 68

Quick Handover Punish

Value(dB)HO 63 63 63

Quick Handover Punish

Time(s)HO 10 10 10

Ignore Measurement

Report NumberHO 1 1 1

Neighbor Cell Filter

Length MR NumberHO 4 4 4

Serving Cell Filter

Length MR NumberHO 4 4 4

Quick Handover Last

Time (0.5s)HO 3 3 3

Quick Handover Static

Time(0.5s)HO 4 4 4

Quick Move Speed

Threshold(m/s)HO 80 80 80

Quick Handover Down

Trigger Level(dB)HO 63 63 63

Quick Handover Up

Trigger Level(dB)HO 63 63 63

Inner Cell Serious

OverLoad Threshold(%)HO 90 90 90

Number of Satisfactory

Measurements(s)HO As per plan As per plan As per plan

Total Number of

Measurements(s)HO 5 5 5

Inter UL And OL

Subcells HO Penalty

Time(s)

HO 5 5 5

Outgoing OL Subcell

HO level Threshold(dB)HO 25 25 25

Incoming OL Subcell

HO level Threshold(dB)HO

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

As per frequency

plan

Step Length of OL

Subcell Load HO(dB)HO Yes Yes 5

OL Subcell Load

Diversity HO Period(s)HO 10 10 10

Load HO of OL Subcell

to UL Subcell EnabledHO No No No

Modified Step Length

of UL Load HO

Period(s)

HO 1 1 1

Step Length of UL

Subcell Load HO(dB)HO 5 5 5

UL Subcell Load

Hierarchical HO

Period(s)

HO 5 5 5

Distance Hysteresis

Between Boundaries of

UL And OL Subcells(dB)

HO 2 2 2

Distance Between

Boundaries of UL And

OL Subcells(dB)

HO 10 10 10

Allowed Flow Control

Level of UL And OL

Subcell HO

HO 10 10 10

UL Subcell Serious

Overload Threshold(%)HO 90 90 90

UL Subcell General

Overload Threshold(%)HO 1 80 80

Assignment

Optimization of OL

Subcell Allowed Or Not

HO No No No

Assignment

Optimization of UL

Subcell Allowed Or Not

HO Yes Yes Yes

UL Subcell Lower Load

Threshold(%)HO 50 50 50

Better 3G Cell HO

AllowedHO No No No

3G Better Cell HO Valid

Time(s)HO 4 4 4

3G Better Cell HO

Watch Time(s)HO 5 5 5

Ec/No Threshold for

Better 3G Cell HOHO 35 35 35

RSCP Threshold for

Better 3G Cell HOHO 50 50 50

HO Preference

Threshold for 2G CellHO 25 25 25

Inter-RAT HO

PreferenceHO

Preference for 2G

Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G

Cell By Threshold

Preference for 2G

Cell By Threshold

Ps UtoO HO Received

Level ThresholdHO 35 35 35

Ps OtoU HO Received


ReceiveQualThrshAMR

HRHO 60 60 60

ReceiveQualThrshAMR

FRHO 65 65 65

En Iuo In Cell Load

Classification HO StepHO 5 5 5

En Iuo In Cell Load

Classification HO

Period

HO 5 5 5

En Iuo Out Cell Serious

OverLoad ThresholdHO 90 90 90

En Iuo Out Cell General

OverLoad ThresholdHO 85 85 85

En Iuo Out Cell Low

Load ThresholdHO 30 30 20

MaxRetry Time after

UtoO FailHO 3 3 3

Penalty Time after

OtoU HO Fail(s)HO 10 10 10

Penalty Time after

UtoO HO Fail(s)HO 40 40 40

Penalty Time of UtoO

HO(s)HO 10 10 10

Underlay HO Step

LevelHO 5 5 5

Underlay HO Step

Period(s)HO 5 5 5

UtoO Traffic HO

AllowedHO Yes Yes Yes

UtoO HO Received


OtoU HO Received


Incoming-to-BSC HO

Optimum LayerHO Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell Underlaid Subcell

Pref. Subcell in HO of

Intra-BSCHO

System

Optimization

System

Optimization

System

Optimization

TA Threshold of Imme-

Assign Pref.HO 0 0 0

TA Pref. of Imme-

Assign AllowedHO No No No

TA Threshold of

Assignment Pref.HO 63 63 63

Assign-optimum-level

ThresholdHO 35 35 35

Assign Optimum Layer HOSystem

Optimization

System

Optimization

System

Optimization

UO HO Valid Time(s) HO 4 4 4

UO HO Watch Time(s) HO 5 5 5

TA Hysteresis HO 0 0 0

TA Threshold HO 63 63 63

RX_QUAL Threshold HO 50 50 60

RX_LEV Hysteresis HO 5 5 5

RX_LEV Threshold HO 35 35 35

UO Signal Intensity

DifferenceHO 0 0 0

TA for UO HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

RX_QUAL for UO HO

AllowedHO No No No

RX_LEV for UO HO


OL to UL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

UL to OL HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Load Threshold for

TIGHT BCCH HOHO 80 80 80

RX_QUAL Threshold

for TIGHT BCCH HOHO 4 4 3

K Bias HO 0 0 0

UL Expected Level at

HO AccessHO 30 30 30

Penalty Time on Fast

Moving HO(s)HO 40 40 40

Penalty on MS Fast

Moving HOHO 30 30 30

Interval for

Consecutive HO Jud.HO 6 6 6

Forbidden time after

MAX TimesHO 20 20 20

MAX Consecutive HO

TimesHO 3 3 3

MS Fast-moving Time


MS Fast-moving Valid

CellsHO 2 2 2

MS Fast-moving Watch

CellsHO 3 3 3

Load HO Step Level HO 5 5 5

Load HO Step Period HO 10 10 10

Load HO Bandwidth HO 25 25 25

Load Req.on Candidate

CellHO 75 75 75

Load HO Threshold HO 85 85 85

System Flux Threshold

for Load HOHO 10 10 10

ULQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60

DLQuaLimitAMRHR HO 60 60 60

ULQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65

DLQuaLimitAMRFR HO 60 60 65

RXLEVOff HO 5 5 5

RXQUAL12 HO 50 50 50



RXQUAL9 HO 53 53 53

RXQUAL8 HO 54 54 54

RXQUAL7 HO 55 55 55

RXQUAL6 HO 56 56 56

RXQUAL5 HO 57 57 57

RXQUAL4 HO 58 58 58

RXQUAL3 HO 59 59 59

RXQUAL2 HO 60 60 60

RXQUAL1 HO 70 70 70

Cons.No Dl Mr.HO

Allowed LimitHO 8 8 8

No Dl Mr.Ul Qual HO

LimitHO 60 60 60

No Dl Mr.HO Allowed HO No No No

Filter Parameter B HO 0 0 0

Filter Parameter A8 HO 10 10 10








UL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60

DL Qual. Threshold HO 60 60 60

Emergency HO TA


DtxMeasUsed HO Open Open Open

CfgPenaltyTimer HO 255 255 255

UmPenaltyTimer HO 10 10 10

RscPenaltyTimer HO 5 5 5


NBR_RCVD_BLOCKHO 6 6 6


NBR_RCVD_BLOCKHO 2 2 2

Penalty Time after

AMR TCHF-H HO Fail(s)HO 30 30 30


REP_QUANTHO 6 6 6


REP_QUANTHO 2 2 2


CV_BEPHO 6 6 6


CV_BEPHO 2 2 2


MEAN_BEPHO 6 6 6


MEAN_BEPHO 2 2 2

Penalty Time after TA

HO(s)HO 30 30 30

Penalty Level after TA

HOHO 63 63 63

Penalty Time after BQ

HO(s)HO 15 15 15

Penalty Level after BQ

HOHO 63 63 63

Penalty Level after HO

FailHO 30 30 30

Filter Length for TA HO 6 6 4

Filter Length for Ncell

RX_LEVHO 6 6 4


QualHO 3 3 2


LevelHO 3 3 2


QualHO 6 6 4


LevelHO 6 6 4

Allowed M.R Number

LostHO 4 4 4

Min Power Level For

Direct TryHO 25 25 16

Sent Freq.of

preprocessed MRHO

Twice every

secondTwice every second

Twice every

second

Transfer BS/MS Power

ClassHO Yes Yes Yes

Transfer Original MR HO Yes Yes No

MR.Preprocessing HO No No No

MS Power Prediction

after HOHO No No No

Penalty Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Inter-BSC SDCCH HO

ALLowedHO No No No

Min Interval for

Emerg.HOsHO 6 6 4

Min Interval for

Consecutive HOsHO 6 6 4

Min Interval for SDCCH

HOsHO 2 2 2

Min Interval for TCH

HOsHO 4 4 2

ATCBHoSwitch HO Open Open Open

TIGHT BCCH HO Valid

Time(s)HO 2 2 2

TIGHT BCCH HO Watch

Time(s)HO 3 3 3

Quick Handover Enable HO NO NO NO

H2F HO Threshold HO 10 10 10

F2H HO Threshold HO 30 30 25

Intracell F-H HO Last

Time(s)HO 4 4 4

Intracell F-H HO Stat

Time(s)HO 5 5 5

Intracell F-H HO

AllowedHO Yes Yes YES

Min DL Power on HO

Candidate CellHO 15 15 15

Min UP Power on HO

Candidate CellHO 10 10 10

Inter-layer HO

HysteresisHO 3 3 3

Inter-layer HO


Inter-System Handover

EnableHO No No No

PBGT Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2

PBGT Watch Time(s) HO 3 3 3

Layer HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2

Layer HO Watch

Time(s)HO 3 3 3

Edge HO AdjCell Valid

Time(s)HO 2 2 2

Edge HO AdjCell Watch

Time(s)HO 3 3 3

Edge HO Valid Time(s) HO 2 2 2

Edge HO Watch

Time(s)HO 3 3 3

Edge HO DL RX_LEV


Edge HO UL RX_LEV


Interference HO


Concentric Circles HO


TA HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

BQ HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Fringe HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Level HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

PBGT HO Allowed HO Yes Yes Yes

Rx_Level_Drop HO

AllowedHO No No No

MS Fast Moving HO

AllowedHO No No No

Load HO Allowed HO No No No

Intracell HO Allowed HO No No No

SDCCH HO Allowed HO No No No

Co-BSC/MSC Adj HO Yes Yes Yes

PT(s) Idle_Mode 0 0 0

TO Idle_Mode 0 0 0

ACS Idle_Mode No No No

CRO(2dB) Idle_Mode 0 0 0

Cell_Bar_Qualify Idle_Mode No No No

PI Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes

CRH Idle_Mode 6dB 6dB 6dB

Period of Periodic

Location Update(6

minutes)

Idle_Mode 60 60 20

BS-PA-MFRAMS Idle_Mode4 Multiframe

Period4 Multiframe Period

2 Multiframe

Period

BS_AG_BLKS_RES Idle_Mode 2 2 2

NCC Permitted Idle_Mode 11111111 11111111 11111111

Cell_Bar_Access Idle_Mode No No No

Tx-integer Idle_Mode 32 32 32

ATT Idle_Mode Yes Yes Yes

Timer for UL Data

Forward(ms)Other_Properties 10 10 10

WaitforRelIndAMRHR Other_Properties 26000 26000 26000

WaitforRelIndAMRFR Other_Properties 34000 34000 34000

T3103C(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000

T3122(s) Other_Properties 10 10 10

TREESTABLISH(ms) Other_Properties 15000 15000 15000

T3111(ms) Other_Properties 1000 1000 1000






T3103A(ms) Other_Properties 10000 10000 10000

ImmAss A Interf

Creation Timer(ms)Other_Properties 5000 5000 5000


Send Classmark

Enquiring Result To

MSC Enable

Other_Properties No No No

Enquire Classmark

After In-BSC Handover

Enable


Base Hop Support

Close TRX AllowedOther_Properties No No No

Qtru Signal Merge

SwitchOther_Properties No No No

MAX Paging Message

Number 0f Cell In

Period

Other_Properties 220 220 220

Average Paging

Message Number 0f

Cell In Period


Paging Numbers of one

Optimizing MsgsOther_Properties 5 5 5

Interval For Sending

Paging Optimizing

Msgs


Paging Messages

Optimize at Abis

Interface

Other_Properties Forced turn-on Forced turn-on Forced turn-on

Interfere Band Stat

Algorithm TypeOther_Properties

Interference

Band

Measurement

Algorithm II

Interference Band

Measurement

Algorithm II

Interference Band

Measurement

Algorithm II

Cell Out-of-Service

Alarm SwitchOther_Properties Yes Yes Yes

Lower-level sublink

resources preemption

switch


Sublink resources

preemption switchOther_Properties No No No

Force MS to Send Ho

Access SWITCHOther_Properties Yes Yes Yes

IntraCellHo to Ass

SWITCHOther_Properties No No No

Frequency Scan Result

TypeOther_Properties

Maximum/Mean

Value

Maximum/Mean

Value

Maximum/Mean

Value

Drop Optimize Intra-

Cell Handover TimeoutOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize Intra-

Bsc Out-Cell Handover

Timeout


Drop Optimize Out-Bsc

Handover TimeoutOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize Into-Bsc

Handover TimeoutOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize

Resource CheckOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize No MR

For Long TimeOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize Forced

Handover FailureOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize

Equipment FailureOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize ABIS

Territorial Link FailureOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize Release

IndicationOther_Properties 1 1 1

Drop Optimize

Connection Failure

(other)


Drop Optimize

Connection Failure

(radio resource not

available)


Drop Optimize

Connection Failure

(OM intervention)


Drop Optimize

Connection Failure (HO

access fail)


Drop Optimize

Connection Failure

(radio link fail)


Drop Optimize Error

Indication (sequence

error)


Drop Optimize Error

Indication (unsolicited

DM response)


Drop Optimize Error

Indication (T200

timeout)


Directly Magnifier Site

FlagOther_Properties No No No

Aiding Delay Protect

Time(min)Other_Properties 15 15 15

Abis Flow Control

PermittedOther_Properties Yes Yes Yes

Support Half Rate Other_Properties Yes Yes No

MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH Other_Properties 5 5 5

PWRC Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes

ActGene Other_Properties 5 5 5

PS LowPri ServicePRI Other_Properties 6 6 6

PS HighPRI ServicePRI Other_Properties 4 4 4

CS Data ServicePRI Other_Properties 5 5 5

CS Voice ServicePRI Other_Properties 3 3 3

Included

Angle(Degree)Other_Properties 360 360 360

Antenna Azimuth

Angle(Degree)Other_Properties 360 360 360

Average RACH Load

Timeslot NumberOther_Properties 5000 5000 5000

Overload Indication

PeriodOther_Properties 15 15 15

CCCH Load Threshold Other_Properties 80 80 80

CCCH Load Indication

Period(s)Other_Properties 15 15 15

Radio Resource Report

Period(s)Other_Properties 10 10 10

Frequency Adjust

ValueOther_Properties 36671 36671 36671

Frequency Adjust

SwitchOther_Properties NO NO NO

VSWR TRX Error

ThresholdOther_Properties 2 2 2

VSWR TRX Unadjusted


Power Output

Reduction ThresholdOther_Properties 2 2 2

Power Output Error


DC Bias Voltage


Frame Start Time Other_Properties 65535 65535 65535

Max RC Power

Reduction(2dB)Other_Properties 5 5 5

Interf.Calculation

Period(SACCH

period(480ms))


Interf. Band Threshold

5 (-dBm)Other_Properties 85 85 85











Cell Direct Try

Forbidden ThresholdOther_Properties 3 3 50

SMCBC DRX Other_Properties Yes Yes Yes

Data service Allowed Other_Properties 118 118 118

Power boost before

HO enabled or notOther_Properties StartUp StartUp not StartUp

Voice quality report

switchOther_Properties report report not report

Diversity LNA Bypass

PermittedOther_Properties 255 255 Yes

HwIII MA FreqHop

Gain 8(dB)Power_Control 53 53 53

HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII MA FreqHop


HwIII UL MAX

UpStep(dB)Power_Control 8 8 8

HwIII UL MAX

DownStep(dB)Power_Control 8 8 8

HwIII UL AHS Rex

Qual.Lower

Threshold(dB)

Power_Control 12 12 12

HwIII UL AHS Rex

Qual.Upper

Threshold(dB)


HwIII UL AFS Rex

Qual.Lower

Threshold(dB)


HwIII UL AFS Rex

Qual.Upper

Threshold(dB)


HwIII UL HS Rex

Qual.Lower

Threshold(dB)


HwIII UL HS Rex

Qual.Upper

Threshold(dB)


HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.

Lower Threshold(dB)Power_Control 16 16 16

HwIII UL FS Rex Qual.

Upper Threshold(dB)Power_Control 22 22 22

HwIII UL RexLev Lower

ThresholdPower_Control 20 20 20

HwIII UL RexLev Upper


HwIII UL Rex

Qual.Adjust FactorPower_Control 6 6 6

HwIII UL RexLev Adjust

FactorPower_Control 4 4 4

HwIII UL Rex Qual.

Slide WindowPower_Control 1 1 1

HwIII UL RexLev Slide

WindowPower_Control 1 1 1

HwIII UL Rex

Qual.Exponent Filter

Length

Power_Control 3 3 3

HwIII UL RexLev

Exponent Filter LengthPower_Control 3 3 3

HwIII DL MAX UpStep

(dB)Power_Control 8 8 8

HwIII DL MAX

DownStep(dB)Power_Control 8 8 8

HwIII DL AHS Rex Qual.


HwIII DL AHS Rex

Qual.Upper

Threshold(dB)


HwIII DL AFS Rex

Qual.Lower

Threshold(dB)


HwIII DL AFS Rex

Qual.Upper

Threshold(dB)


HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.


HwIII DL HS Rex Qual.


HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.


HwIII DL FS Rex Qual.


HwIII DL RexLev Lower


HwIII DL RexLev Upper


HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Adjust FactorPower_Control 6 6 6

HwIII DL RexLev Adjust

FactorPower_Control 6 6 6

HwIII DL Rex Qual.

Slide WindowPower_Control 1 1 1

HwIII DL RexLev Slide

WindowPower_Control 1 1 1

HwIII DL Rex Qual.


HwIII DL RexLev


HwIII Traffic Channel

Discard MR NumberPower_Control 3 3 3

HwIII Signal Channel

Discard MR NumberPower_Control 1 1 1

HwIII Down Link Power

Control Adjust PeriodPower_Control 3 3 3

HwIII Up Link Power

Control Adjust PeriodPower_Control 3 3 3

HwIII Number of lost

MRs allowedPower_Control 5 5 5

AMR BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16

AMR DL Qual Bad

UpLEVDiffPower_Control 0 0 0

AMR DL Qual Bad Trig


AMR UL Qual. Bad


AMR UL Qual. Bad Trig


AMR MAX Up Adj. PC

Value by Qual.Power_Control 8 8 8

AMR MAX Up Adj. PC

Value by RX_LEVPower_Control 16 16 16

AMR MAX Down Adj.

PC Value by Qual.Power_Control 4 4 4

AMR MAX Down Adj.

Value Qual. Zone 2Power_Control 4 4 4

AMR MAX Down Adj.


AMR MAX Down Adj.


AMR DL Qual. Lower


AMR DL Qual. Upper


AMR DL RX_LEV Lower


AMR DL RX_LEV Upper


AMR UL Qual. Lower


AMR ULQual. Upper


AMR UL RX_LEV Lower


AMR UL RX_LEV Upper


AMR DL MR. Number

PredictedPower_Control 2 2 0

AMR UL MR. Number


AMR MR.

Compensation AllowedPower_Control Yes Yes Yes

AMR Filter Length for

DL Qual.Power_Control 6 6 6


UL QualPower_Control 6 6 6


DL RX_LEVPower_Control 6 6 6


UL RX_LEVPower_Control 6 6 6

AMR PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3

BTS PC Class Power_Control 16 16 16

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff Power_Control 0 0 0

DL Qual. Bad Trig


UL Qual. Bad


UL Qual. Bad Trig


MAX Up Adj. PC Value

by Qual.Power_Control 8 8 8

MAX Up Adj. PC Value

by RX_LEVPower_Control 16 16 16

MAX Down Adj. PC

Value by Qual.Power_Control 4 4 4

MAX Down Adj.Value

Qual.Zone 2Power_Control 4 4 4

MAX Down Adj.Value


MAX Down Adj.Value


DL MR. Number


UL MR. Number


MR. Compensation

AllowedPower_Control Yes Yes Yes

Filter Length for DL

Qual.Power_Control 5 5 5

Filter Length for UL

Qual.Power_Control 5 5 5

Filter Length for DL

RX_LEVPower_Control 5 5 5

Filter Length for UL

RX_LEVPower_Control 5 5 5

Power Control

Algorithm SwitchPower_Control

HWII Power

ControlHWII Power Control

HW-II Power

Control

DL Qual. Lower


DL Qual. Upper


DL RX_LEV Lower


DL RX_LEV Upper


UL Qual. Lower


UL Qual. Upper


UL RX_LEV Lower


UL RX_LEV Upper


PC Interval Power_Control 3 3 3

Constant of Filtering

the Collision Signal

Strength for Power

Control

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Measured Receive

Power Level ChannelData_In_PCU pdch pdch pdch

BTS Power Attenuation

on PBCCHData_In_PCU -2dB -2dB -2dB

Signal Strength Filter

Period in Transfer

Mode

Data_In_PCU 10 10 10

Signal Strength Filter

Period in Idle ModeData_In_PCU 10 10 10

Initial Power Level Data_In_PCU 14 14 14

Alpha Parameter Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Maximum Value of

N3105Data_In_PCU 10 10 10

Maximum Value of


Maximum Value of


Release Delay of

Downlink TBF(ms)Data_In_PCU 2400 2400 2400

Inactive Period of

Extended Uplink

TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU 2000 2000 2000

Release Delay of Non-

extended Uplink

TBF(ms)

Data_In_PCU 120 120 120

Load Reselect Level

ThresholdData_In_PCU 40 40 40

GPRS Quality


EDGE 8PSK Quality


EDGE GMSK Quality


Cell Reselect Interval(s) Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Normal Cell

Reselection Worsen

Level Threshold

Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Normal Cell

Reselection Watch

Period


Cell Normal

Reselection AllowedData_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit

Cell Load Reselection

AllowedData_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit

Cell Urgent Reselection

AllowedData_In_PCU Permit Permit Permit

2G/3G Cell Reselection

StrategyData_In_PCU

Preference for 2G

Cell

Preference for 2G

Cell

Preference for 2G

Cell

Filter Window Size Data_In_PCU 6 6 6

Allowed Measure

Report Missed NumberData_In_PCU 4 4 4

Load Reselection

Receive Threshold(%)Data_In_PCU 60 60 60

Load Reselection Start

Threshold(%)Data_In_PCU 85 85 85

MS Rx Quality Worsen

Ratio Threshold(%)Data_In_PCU 30 30 30

MS Rx Quality Statistic


Cell Penalty Last

Time(s)Data_In_PCU 10 10 10

Cell Penalty Level Data_In_PCU 30 30 30

Cell Reselection

HysterisisData_In_PCU 6 6 6

Min Access Level


Support QoS Optimize Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

PS Concentric Cell HO

StrategyData_In_PCU

No handover

between

underlaid subcell

and overlaid

subcell

No handover

between underlaid

subcell and overlaid

subcell

No handover

between

underlaid subcell

and overlaid

subcell

Transmission Delay of

POC ServiceData_In_PCU 650 650 650

Max. GBR for POC

ServiceData_In_PCU 16 16 16

Min. GBR for POC

ServiceData_In_PCU 6 6 6

Move Packet

Assignment Down to

BTS

Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Move Immediate

Assignment Down to

BTS

Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Support Gbr QoS Data_In_PCU Not Support Not Support Not Support

Downlink Default MCS

TypeData_In_PCU MCS6 MCS6 MCS6

Downlink Fixed MCS

TypeData_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED

Uplink Default MCS

TypeData_In_PCU MCS2 MCS2 MCS2

Uplink Fixed MCS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED

BEP Period Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Link Quality Control

ModeData_In_PCU LA LA LA

Down TBF threshold

From CS4 to CS3Data_In_PCU 5 5 5

Down TBF threshold


Down TBF threshold


Down TBF threshold


Down TBF threshold


Down TBF threshold


Downlink Default CS

TypeData_In_PCU CS2 CS2 CS2

Downlink Fixed CS

TypeData_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED

Up TBF threshold From

CS4 to CS3Data_In_PCU 5 5 5











Uplink Default CS Type Data_In_PCU CS1 CS1 CS1

Uplink Fixed CS Type Data_In_PCU UNFIXED UNFIXED UNFIXED

Background Service

Priority WeightData_In_PCU 5 5 5

THP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1



ARP3 Priority Weight Data_In_PCU 1 1 1



Timer of Releasing Abis

TimeslotData_In_PCU 15 15 15

Reservation Threshold

of Dynamic Channel

Conversion

Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Level of Preempting

Dynamic ChannelData_In_PCU

All dynamic

channels can be

pre-empted

All dynamic

channels can be pre-

empted

All dynamic

channels can be

preempted.

Timer of Releasing Idle

Dynamic ChannelData_In_PCU 20 20 20

Dynamic Channel

Conversion Parameter

of Concentric Cell

Data_In_PCUOnly convert at

ULOnly convert at UL

only convert

dynamic channel

at UL

PDCH Downlink

Multiplex ThresholdData_In_PCU 80 80 80

PDCH Uplink Multiplex


Downlink Multiplex

Threshold of Dynamic

Channel Conversion


Uplink Multiplex

Threshold of Dynamic

Channel Conversion


Maximum Ratio

Threshold of PDCHs in

a Cell


MultiBand reporting Data_In_PCU

Report the

frequencies of six

strongest cells

Report the

frequencies of six

strongest cells

Report the

frequencies of six

strongest cells

Threshold of HCS

Signal StrengthData_In_PCU -110dB -110dB -110dB

Cell HCS Prior Class Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

Maximum TX Power

for Access PCHData_In_PCU 2 2 2

Minimum Receiving

level for AccessData_In_PCU 2 2 2

Exclusive Access Data_In_PCU Not Exclusive Not Exclusive Not Exclusive

Cell Access Bar Switch Data_In_PCUPermit Cell

Access Permit Cell Access Permit Cell Access

Accessorial Hysteresis

of Cell Selection In

New Routing Area

Data_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB

Cell Reselection

Forbidden TimeData_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec

Allow MS to Access to

another CellData_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes

Exceptional Rule for

GPRS Reselect OffsetData_In_PCU 0 0 0

GPRS Cell Reselect

Hysteresis Applied to

C31 Criterion or not

Data_In_PCU c31standard c31standard c31standard

GPRS Cell Reselect

HysteresisData_In_PCU 2dB 2dB 2dB

Support PSI Status

MessageData_In_PCU No No No

Allow MR Command or

notData_In_PCU No No No

PSI1 Repetition Period Data_In_PCU 6 6 6

Persistence Level 4 Data_In_PCU 16 16 16




Extension Transmission

Timeslots of Random

Access


Minimum Timeslots

between Two

Successive Channel

Requests


Maximum

Retransmissions for

Radio Priority 4

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Maximum

Retransmissions for

Radio Priority 3

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Maximum

Retransmissions for

Radio Priority 2

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Maximum

Retransmissions for

Radio Priority 1

Data_In_PCU 7 7 7

Access Control Class Data_In_PCU 0 0 0

PRACH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

PAGCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 4 4 4

PBCCH Blocks Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Cell Reselection MR

Period in Packet

Transfer Mode

Data_In_PCU 0.96sec 0.96sec 0.96sec

Cell Reselection MR

Period in Packet Idle

Mode

Data_In_PCU 15.36sec 15.36sec 15.36sec

Non-DRX Period Data_In_PCU 0.24sec 0.24sec 0.24sec

GPRS Reselection

OffsetData_In_PCU -2db -2db -2dB

GPRS Penalty Time Data_In_PCU 10sec 10sec 10sec

GPRS Temporary

OffsetData_In_PCU 10dB 10dB 10dB

Extension MR Period Data_In_PCU 60sec 60sec 60sec

Extension MR Type Data_In_PCU type1 type1 type1

Interference Frequency Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

NCC_PERMITTED Data_In_PCU 1 1 1

Extension

Measurement

Command

Data_In_PCU em0 em0 em0

BSS Paging

CoordinationData_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes

Support 11BIT EGPRS

AccessData_In_PCU Yes Yes Yes

Routing Area Color

CodeData_In_PCU 1 1 1

Packet Access Priority Data_In_PCUPacket access of

level 4

Packet access of

level 4

Packet access of

level 4

Support

SPLIT_PG_CYCLE on

CCCH

Data_In_PCU No No No

Network Control Mode Data_In_PCU nc0 nc0 nc0

Pan Max. Data_In_PCU 12 12 12

Pan Increment Data_In_PCU 4 4 4

Pan Decrement Data_In_PCU 2 2 2

BS_CV_MAX Data_In_PCU 10 10 10

Control Acknowledge

TypeData_In_PCU

Four access

pulses by default

Four access pulses

by default

Four access pulses

by default

Access Burst Type Data_In_PCU 8bit 8bit 8bit

Max. Duration of

DRX(s)Data_In_PCU 4 4 4s

T3192 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms

T3168 Data_In_PCU 500ms 500ms 500ms

Network Operation

ModeData_In_PCU

Network

Operation Mode

II

Network Operation

Mode II

Network

Operation Mode II

Description Configuration Policy

This parameter specifies the layer where a cell is located. The network designed by

Huawei has four layers: Pico, Micro, Macro, and Umbrella, numbered 1-4 respectively.

The Pico layer is a microcell layer on the 900 MHz and 1800 MHz frequency bands. It m

The network has four layers, numbered 1-4 respectively. If

the number of the layer is small, the priority of the layer is

high.

This parameter and Cell Priority determine the priority of a

cell.

This parameter specifies the mobile country code (MCC), for example, the MCC of China

is 460. None

This parameter specifies the mobile network code (MNC). None

This parameter specifies the network color code, which is provided by the telecom

operator. The NCC is used to identify networks from area to area. The NCC is unique

nationwide.

The NCC and the BCC form the base station identification code (BSIC).

This parameter should be set as required.

This parameter specifies the base station color code. The BCC identifies the cells with

the same BCCH frequency in the neighborhood. The BCC and the NCC form the BSIC.

1. A training sequence is known by both the transmit end

and the receive end. It is used to acknowledge the exact

position of the other bits in the same burst and to

determine whether the received co-channel signals are

useful signals. If a burst is incon

This parameter specifies the handover between the cells at the same layer.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the priority is high. Generally, the cells at the

same layer have the same priority.

For details, refer to Layer of the Cell.

Each layer has 16 priorities, numbered 1-16 respectively. If

the number of the priority is small, the priority is high. This

parameter along with Layer of the Cell determines the

priority of a cell. The priority affects the sequencing of

neighbor cells fo

This parameter specifies the activation status of a cell. The activation status can be Not

Activated or Activated. None

This parameter specifies the number of the PCU that is connected to the E1 link on the

Pb interface.None

This parameter specifies whether to enable the general packet radio service (GPRS) in a

cell. The GPRS requires the support of the BTS. In addition, a packet control unit (PCU)

must be configured on the BSS side, and a serving GPRS support node (SGSN) mus

None

The parameter specifies whether the PCU supports baseband FH and EDGE

simultaneously. None

This parameter specifies whether to enable the EDGE function in a cell. Compared with

GSM, EDGE supports high-rate data transmission. The enhanced data rates for GSM

evolution (EDGE) consists of EGPRS and ECSD. The EGPRS is the enhanced GPRS, which

improv

None

This parameter specifies the power attenuation level of a timeslot when 8PSK is used by

an EDGE-enabled TRX. The attenuation value has 50 levels. Each level attenuates by 0.2

dB.

The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits

None

This parameter specifies whether the cell support the Network Assisted Cell Change

(NACC) function.

In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the MS is in the packet transmission

mode, the network informs the MS of the system information about neighb

Yes: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the

MS is in the packet transmission mode, the network informs

the MS of the system information about neighbor cells in

advance.

No: In network control mode NC0, NC1, or NC2, when the

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the PACKET SI STATUS procedure.

When the cell is configured with the PBCCH, the MS sends the Packet PSI/SI Status

message to the BSC, indicating that the MS has stored the system message. The BSC

sends th

None

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Network Control 2 (NC2)

function.

In NC2, the MS reports the measurement report of the reference cell and neighbor cells

to the BSC. The BSC controls cell reselection (including normal reselections a

None

This parameter specifies whether the PCU supports 64 neighbor cells.

In the NACC and NC2 functions, this parameter affects the ability of the BSC to report

the number of neighbor cells.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports the

information about all neighbor cells to the PCU when there

are more than 32 neighbor cells. If this parameter is set to

No, the BSC reports the information about a maximum of

32 neighbor cells to the PC

For the BTS3002C, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+,BTS22C and BTS20, the default value is Invalid

and cannot be manually modified. That is, the main and diversity level cannot be

reported. For other types of BTSs, the default value is Support and can be manually

modif

None

This parameter specifies the frequency band of new cells. Each new cell can be allocated

frequencies of only one frequency band. Once the frequency band is selected, it cannot

be changed.

GSM900: The cell supports GSM900 frequency band.

DCS1800: The cell

None

This parameter specifies that the network service (NS) in the GPRS packet service state

performs location management based on the routing area.

Each routing area has an ID. The routing area ID is broadcast in the system message.

For example, value 0 indic

None

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the Dual Transfer Mode (DTM)

function. The DTM function enables an MS to provide both the CS service and the PS

service at the same time. The function requires the support of the BSC.

None

This parameter specifies whether the cell supports the enhanced DTM function.

Compared with the DTM function, the enhanced DTM function enhances the CS setup

and release. When the CS service is set up, the PS service is not disrupted.

None


The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit

to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A

None


If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell

where the TRX serves does not perform FH. FH can be used to average the interferen

None



transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no

voice transfer. This function has the following benefits:

1. On the uplink: decreasing the power consumption of the

MS and reducing system int


After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS

determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by

comparing the TA and the value

The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If

this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover

success rate may be affected.

This parameter specifies whether a cell is an extension cell and specifies how to

implement the extended cell.

A double-timeslot extension cell regards the additional TDMA frame as access delay.

Theoretically, TA equals 219, that is, a delay of about 120

None

This parameter specifies whether a cell supports the antenna hopping function.


transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position

or t

None

This parameter specifies whether the enhanced concentric cell handover is allowed in a

concentric cell.

If the cell supports the enhanced concentric cell function, compare the receive level of

the MS with OtoU HO Received Level Threshold and with UtoO HO

None

This parameter specifies whether a cell is a normal cell or a concentric cell.

TRXs in a concentric cell differ in coverage; thus, two subcells with different radiuses

form a concentric cell.

Due to the difference in coverage, the OL subcell and the UL

As specified in Huawei concentric cell technology, a

concentric cell is divided into an OL subcell and a UL subcell.

The TRXs of the OL subcell and of the UL subcell can use

different frequency reuse modes.

The concentric cell technology can be combined

This parameter specifies whether a cell is the OL subcell or the UL subcell. This

parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell. None

This parameter specifies whether the main BCCH is configured in the OL subcell or the

UL subcell.

In the scenario of the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive frequency

reuse of the OL subcell, this parameter is set to Underlaid Subcell.

In

When the BCCH is configured in the OL subcell, it is not

configured in the UL subcell.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous

Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power

transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function

has the following benefits:


MS and reducing system interference

This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by

tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may

drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resu

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment

is allowed.




This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For

details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47

dBm).

If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level

of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to

camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the

risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the

parameter based

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving

an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH

when receiving an initial access request.

None




network. It is n

None

This parameter specifies whether the SDCCH dynamic allocation is allowed.

When the number of GSM subscribers in a cell increases rapidly, many subscribers may

fail to access the network due to insufficient SDCCH resources. In this case, the TCHs

(includi

None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None

This parameter specifies whether the BSC determines to enable or disable the power

amplifier of a TRX based on the traffic volume.None


amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.None

This parameter specifies the unique index number of each TRX in a BSC. None

This parameter specifies the TRX number, which must be unique in one BTS.

The following two points should be paid attention to:

1. If the logical TRX is not separated from the physical board, This parameter specifies

the TRX number in a cabinet. For such BTSs as the BTS3012II and BTS3002E, the TRX

numbers may be discontinuous.

None

Cell Index must be unique in one BSC. It is used to uniquely identify a cell. The value of

this parameter ranges from 0 to 8047.

Internal 2G cells: 0-2047



None

This parameter specifies the index number of a BTS. Each BTS is numbered uniquely in a

BSC.None

This parameter is used to differentiate boards with unique identifiers in the BTS. None

This parameter specifies the operating status of the BTS, not-activated and activated.

If you activate a not-activated BTS, all the cells, TRXs, and

boards in this BTS will be activated.

Conversely, if you deactivate an activated BTS, all the cells,

TRXs, and boards in this BTS will be deactivated.

When the BTSs are cascaded, the lower-level BTS should be

This parameter specifies the Abis mode of OML.

The default value is calculated automatically, that is, the BSC assigns the Abis time slot

of OML automatically.

Generally, the timeslots are automatically calculated and

assigned. The timeslots, however, can be also manually

assigned to meet the requirement of operators. The

manually assigned OML timeslot cannot be adjusted when

the timeslot is arranged.

This parameter specifies the number of a cabinet. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter specifies the number of a subrack. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where a board is located. This parameter cannot be modified once it takes effect.

This parameter specifies the terminal equipment identifier on the link layer.

This parameter is used to identify multiple signaling links on the same physical link when

the LAPDs are multiplexed on the highway timeslot.

None

This parameter specifies the number of the TC subrack where the GEIUT/GOIUT is

located.

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the

occupied subrack.

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GEIUT or GOIUT is located in

the TC subrack, which is connected to the local subrack. None

This parameter specifies the out-BSC port number on the interface board used by the

semi-permanent link.

When the semi-permanent link is configured on the electrical interface board, each

electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to

31.

This parameter cannot be set to the number of the

occupied E1 port.

If all semi-permanent links are configured on one interface

board, the In-BSC Port No. and the Out-BSC Port No. must

be set to different E1 ports on the interface board. This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC timeslot occupied by the E1 port

over the Abis interface.

The bandwidth of each E1 is divided into 32 timeslots. Generally, timeslot 0 is used for

synchronization and cannot be otherwise used.

The E1 timeslot is numbered by 8 kbit/s, and the range is 0-255.For example, 0-3


If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port

occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. None

If the forward ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the

timeslot occupied by the LAPD link (corresponding to the RSL link) on the Abis interface. None

This parameter specifies the logical link number of the LAPD link (corresponding to the

RSL link) in the BSC. When the BTS works in ring topology, the forward and reverse links

share one number.

Each LAPD link is uniquely numbered in one BSC.

None


If this parameter is set to Not FH, even if the TRX is configured with FH data, the cell

where the TRX serves does not perform FH. The FH can realize average interference and

frequency diversity.

The BTS2X supports frame FH and RF FH. The BTS3X of all

versions supports the cross-cabinet baseband FH and RF FH,

including the timeslot FH and frame FH. The double-

transceiver BTSs support the baseband FH and RF FH,

including the timeslot FH and frame FH, but do not support This parameter specifies the transmit power level of the TRX. The greater this parameter

is, the smaller the transmit power is.

When this parameter is set to 0, the transmit power level of the TRX is the greatest.

Each time this parameter increases by one level, the transmit power reduces by 2 dB.

For different types of BTSs, the value range of this parameter is different.

Adjust the cell coverage area by configuring the Power

Level; however, when the antenna is over high and covers

too many cells, you should lower the antenna and increase

the tilt of the antenna first. When the transmit power of a

BTS reduces, the indoor coverage becomes worse.

This parameter specifies the power levels supported by a TRX. The macro BTS and the

mini BTS support different power levels.None

This parameter specifies the concentric attribute of a cell. For a concentric cell, this

parameter is set to UL subcell or OL subcell according to actual conditions; if the cell is

not a concentric one, this parameter is set to None by default.

None

This parameter specifies the TRX priority. It is used for Huawei II channel assignment

algorithm.

The smaller this parameter is, the higher the TRX priority is.

In other similar conditions, channels are allocated to the

TRX with higher priority.

This parameter specifies whether to turn off the power amplifier of the TRX

automatically for saving power when the BTS is powered by batteries after the external

power supply is cut off.

None

This parameter specifies whether a cell can convert full rate channels to half rate

channels, or convert the half rate channels to full rate channels.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the conversion is allowed; if the parameter is set to No,

the conversion is not allowed. the TCHF that has been converted to the TCHH will be

forcedly restored; the TCHH that has been converted to the TCHF will be forcedly

None

This parameter specifies the power attenuation levels of the EDGE TRX. There are 50

levels, and the attenuation between levels is 0.2 dB.

The EDGE-enabled TRX transmits 8PSK signals with less power than transmits GMSK

signals. Thus, this parameter needs to be set to meet the frequency requirements.

This parameter takes effect only for the EDGE-enabled TRX.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the wireless link alarm parameter to the

BTS. If the parameter is set to Yes, the wireless link alarm parameter is sent; otherwise,

the wireless link alarm parameter is not sent.

None

This parameter specifies the statistics base of a sub-channel (the statistical times that a

sub-channel that is activated). B (the statistics base of a sub-channel on a timeslot) x N

(the number of sub-channels on a timeslot) = S (the total times that channels on a

timeslot that are activated).

For the latest S times of channel activation, if the percentage of abnormally released

None

If the percentage of abnormally released channels exceeds the total successful channel

activation threshold of a timeslot, an abnormally release alarm is generated.None

If the percentage of abnormally released channel in the total successful channel

activation is less than or equal to this threshold, an abnormal release clear alarm is sent.None

If the duration of continuous (not accumulated) no-traffic reaches this threshold, the no-

traffic alarm is generated.None

This parameter specifies whether a critical wireless link alarm is sent.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS sends a critical wireless link alarm if the wireless

link prompt alarm is not cleared during the period specified by WLA Prompting Recover

Period.

None

If the radio link prompt alarm is cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the

corresponding recovery alarm is sent by the BTS. If the radio link prompt alarm is not

cleared in the WLA Prompting Recover Period, the critical wireless link alarm is sent or

not sent according to the settings of the parameter Wireless Link Alarm Critical Permit.

None

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in

each day. Starting from the period specified by this parameter, the BTS detects the

wireless link alarm, and sends an alarm related.

None

The BTS detects the start time of wireless link alarm, such as 08:00:00 and 14:00:00 in

each day. Until the end of the period specified by this parameter, the BTS stops

detecting the wireless link alarm and sending the alarm related. The detection starts

again until the next Begin Time of WLA Detection(hour).

None

This parameter specifies the basic difference value caused by the specified level

difference between the uplink channel and the downlink channel. Together with Up

Down Balance Floating Range, this parameter is used to calculate the number of uplink

and downlink unbalance.


None

This parameter specifies the permissible uplink and downlink balance floating range

relative to Up Down Balance Basic Difference. The uplink and downlink is not balanced

only when the uplink and downlink level exceeds the Up Down Balance Floating Range.


Threshold is set to 30. If the downlink level minus the uplink level after the power

None

When the percentage of the uplink-and-downlink balance measurement reports in the

total valid measurement reports is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,

the uplink and downlink unbalance alarm is generated.

None

This parameter specifies the RF receive mode of the DTRU.

The RF receive mode can be Not Support, Independent Receiver, Dividing Receiver, Four

Diversity Receiver, or Main Diversity.

The BTS3012, BTS3012AE, BTS3012II, BTS3006C, and BTS3002E do not support Main

Diversity.

None

This parameter specifies the RF transmit mode of the TRX.

The RF transmit mode can be Not Support, No Combining, Power Booster Technology,

Wide Band Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY, DPBT, or Transmitter

Independent or Combining.

The BTS3006C and BTS3002E support No Combining, Diversity Transmitter, DDIVERSITY

None



This parameter specifies the following: When the antenna hopping function is used, the

signals of one TRX can switch between different antennas instead of one TRX

corresponding to one antenna. Therefore, the signals on certain frequencies are less

affected by Rayleigh fading compared with those without antenna hopping. The

Antenna Hopping Index corresponds to a TRX number.

None

This parameter specifies the following: Currently, when the BSC performs the static

power control on the TRX, the step of increasing or reducing the power of the TRX is 2

dB. In some scenarios, the TRX has different losses if it is combined on different

tributaries, and the output power difference before and after the combination is not an

integral multiple of 2 dB. Thus, the cabinet top output power of the BTS cannot be

If this parameter is set to a too great or too small value, the

cabinet top output power of the BTS is different from the

TRX output power, resulting in the failure of channel

allocation.

This parameter specifies whether the TRX supports antenna hopping.


transmitted on the BCCH of the main BCCH TRX. If the MS is in an unfavorable position

or the antenna for the main BCCH TRX is faulty, then the MS cannot receive the

broadcast control messages from the main BCCH TRX properly.

None

This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC slot where the BSC interface board

is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the slot that

holds the interface board, which connects the BTS to the BSC.

This parameter can be modified according to the actual requirements. However, it must

be set to the number of the slot that is configured with the interface board.


This parameter specifies the number of the out-BSC port where the BSC interface board

is located when the BTS works in reverse link mode. That is, the number of the port on

the interface board that connects the BTS to the BSC.

When the monitoring timeslot is configured on the electrical interface board, each

electrical interface board is configured with 32 E1 ports, which are numbered from 0 to


If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the RSL

timeslot on the GEIUB/GOIUB/GEHUB port. None

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the port

occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. None

If the reverse ring of the BTSs functions, this parameter specifies the number of the

timeslot occupied by the LAPD link corresponding to the RSL link on the Abis interface. None

This parameter specifies the transmission bearer mode of a TRX: 0-TDM, 1-HDLC, 2-

HDLC_HUB, or 3-IP. None

This parameter specifies the maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a TRX. None

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Abis timeslots occupied by the PDCHs

on a TRX. None

This parameter specifies the number of the TRX that supports the PBT together with the

current TRX. When this parameter is set to the default value 255, you can infer that no

TRX supports the PBT together with the current TRX.

None

This parameter specifies the index of the in-BTS HDLC channel. The in-BTS HDLC channel

connects to the BTS TMU.None

This parameter specifies the index of an HDLC channel between the PEU and the PTU. None

This parameter specifies the unique number of a TRX in the HUB domain in HUB HDLC

transmission mode. None

This parameter specifies the number of the slot where the GXPUM (processing the RSL

signaling) is located.

There are two types of slot number: logical slot number and

physical slot number. When configuring RSL links, set this

parameter to the logical slot number of the GXPUM.

This parameter specifies the priority of the clock reference source.

This parameter need not be set when the Work Mode is set

to Auto.

You must set this parameter when the Work Mode is set to

Manual.

When the Work Mode is set to Free-run, this parameter is

This parameter specifies the HDLC channel index of reverse link in an HDLC ring

network.None

This parameter specifies the allowed power difference between the maximum output

power of the QTRU and the maximum nominal output power. None


amplifier in a cell based on different TRX modulation modes.None




After receiving the channel request message or handover access message, the BTS

determines whether the channel assignment or handover is performed in the cell by

comparing the TA and the value of this parameter.

The value of this parameter correlates with Cell ExtType. If

this parameter is set to a too small value, the handover

success rate may be affected.



transmitter to stop power transmission in the case of no

voice transfer. This function has the following benefits:


MS and reducing system interference


The value of this parameter has eight bits. The eights bits (from the least significant bit

to the most significant bit) specify whether to support the A5/0, A5/1, A5/2, A5/3, A5/4,

A5/5, A5/6, and A5/7 encryption algorithms respectively. If a bit is set to 1, you can infer

that the BSS supports the corresponding encryption algorithm. If a bit is 0, you can infer

None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the BTS power is allowed.. None

This parameter specifies whether the adjustment of the MS power is allowed. None




network. It is not a primary method of clearing traffic congestion. If directed retry is

preformed frequently in a local network, you must adjust the TRX configuration of the

None

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC can assign a TCH and an SDCCH when receiving

an initial access request. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC can assign only an SDCCH

when receiving an initial access request.

None

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level of an MS to access the BSS. For

details. see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47

dBm).

If the value of this parameter is too small, the required level

of received signals is low. Therefore, many MSs attempt to

camp on the cell, thus increasing the load of the cell and the

risk of call drops. In such a case, you must set the

parameter based on the balance conditions of the uplink This parameter specifies whether to allow call reestablishment. Blind spots caused by

tall buildings or burst interference may lead to failure in radio links. Thus a call may

drop. In this case, the MS can initiate a call reestablishment procedure to resume the

call. The number of call drops is not incremented if the call reestablishment is successful

or if the subscriber hooks on.

The average call drop rate decreases if call reestablishment

is allowed.




This parameter specifies whether to allow the MS to use the Discontinuous

Transmission (DTX) function. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

The DTX function allows a transmitter to stop power

transmission in the case of no voice transfer. This function

has the following benefits:


MS and reducing system interference This parameter specifies: for the channel assignment, suppose the MS supports multiple

sub frequency bands of the 900 MHz frequency band. The BSC ignores the priority of P-

GSM/E-GSM/R-GSM sub frequency bands if the cell load is smaller than and equal to

this threshold. The BSC assigns channels on the TRXs with priority of R-GSM, E-GSM, P-

GSM frequency bands if the cell load is greater than this threshold. That is, the BSC

None

This parameter determines when the channel is assigned on the QTRU:

When the channel is assigned on the QTRU board by using the dynamic power sharing

algorithm, and when the remaining power of QTRU board is less than the call required

power of cell,

If this switch is set to Yes, this is allowed to assign the channel; otherwise, this is not

None

The value of this parameter should be added in estimated power when the downlink

path loss is estimated by the uplink path loss.None

This parameter specifies the downlink signal strength estimated by the QTRU power

sharing algorithm together with downlink power control target threshold.The value of

this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).

None

The P/N criterion determines whether the statistics time of QTRU downlink power is

insufficient. This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.None

The P/N criterion determines whether the observation time of QTRU downlink power is

insufficient. This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.None

This parameter specifies the following definitions:

1. The QTRU power sharing algorithm is disabled.

2. Static power sharing algorithm.

3. Dynamic power sharing algorithm.

The difference between static power sharing algorithm and dynamic power sharing

When the total power of the carrier on the single QTRU

board exceeds the maximum permissible output power, the

power sharing algorithm needs to be enabled. If the data

configuration detects that the power sharing must be used,

but the corresponding downlink power control of a cell is

If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold

of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During

the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest

uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.

None

If the uplink received level difference of calls in the same timeslot exceeds the Threshold

of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation must be recorded. During

the observation of P seconds, if this situation lasts N seconds, the call with the lowest

uplink signal strength in the timeslot should be handed over to another timeslot.

None

The value is 0-1 in fact; however, the data in the host and BSC should be simultaneously

multiplied by 10 times to prevent the floating-point values.None

This parameter specifies the QTRU signal merge algorithm, that is, the BSC monitors the

high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5 second.

If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal strength of

this timeslot > Threshold of the difference between uplink received levels, the situation

must be recorded.

None

This parameter specifies whether the BSC is allowed to assign the half-rate channels and

full-rate channels to the MS according to the channel seizure ratio of the underlaid

subcell and overlaid subcell.

None

The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the

channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-

rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.

Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available

TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%. This parameter is valid for the concentric

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate

channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel

seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-

rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity

of the BSC is reduced. The BSC assigns channels in the overlaid subcell to the MS in a concentric cell. If the

channel seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is greater than the value of this parameter, half-

rate channels are assigned. Otherwise, full-rate channels are assigned.

Channel seizure ratio = (Num. of busy TCHF + Num. of busy TCHH/2)/ (Num. of available

TCHF + Num. of available TCHH /2) x 100%.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the half-rate

channels are assigned to the MS only when the channel

seizure ratio of overlaid subcell is very high. Insufficient half-

rate channels can be assigned to the MS. Thus, the capacity

of the BSC is reduced. This parameter specifies whether the dynamic HSN is permitted to be used.

When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,

this parameter is set to YES. Thus, the inter-frequency interference among channels can

be reduced.

Only when the FlexMAIO is set to YES, this parameter can be configured.

None

This parameter specifies whether to enable Flex MAIO.

In tight frequency resuse, the adjacent-channel interference and co-channel

interference among channels occur.

When the frequency hopping function and the FlexMAIO function are enabled in a cell,

the inter-frequency interference among channels can be reduced partially.

None

This parameter specifies the static Abis resource load threshold. When the static Abis

resource load is lower than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load Thred(%), the full-rate

channel is preferentially assigned. Otherwise, the full-rate or half-rate channel is

preferred according to the dynamic Abis resource load.

None

When the static Abis resource load is higher than Fix Abis Prior Choose Abis Load

Thred(%) and the dynamic Abis resource load is higher than Flex Abis Prior Choose Abis

Load Thred(%), the half-rate channel is preferred. Otherwise, the full-rate channel is

preferred.

None

This parameter specifies when the BSC fails to convert the dynamic PDCH back to the

TCH, this operation is not performed during the period specified by this parameter. The

parameter is valid for both built-in PCH and external PCU.

None

The channel type to be assigned is decided according to the channel types that are

allowed by the MSC and the percentage of seized TCHs in the cell.

During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in

the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by

the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs

None

This parameter specifies whether the TCH/H is preferentially assigned on the basis of

the channel type and current service channel seizure ratio that are allowed by the MSC.

During the channel assignment, the TCHF or TCCH, TCHH Prior channels are required in

the following conditions: Half rate and full rate channels are allowed to be assigned by

the MSC, the AMR TCH/H Prior Allowed is set to Yes, and the percentage of seized TCHs

None

The updating of the history record starts when the Update Period of CH Record times

out. Update Freq of CH Record is subtracted from the history priority of each channel to

improve the priority of the channel.


Generally, set this parameter to 2.

None

When the Update Period of CH Record expires, the process of updating the history

record of channel occupancy is started. That is, the history priority of each channel is

reduced by Update Freq.of CH Record at the interval of the setting value of this

parameter to increase the channel priority.


None

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to

determine the signal quality on signaling channels.

The signal quality on signaling channels should not be determined based on only one

measurement result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain

the average value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the burst influence

may be reduced but the judgment of channel status may

not be in time. If this parameter is set to a lower value, the

judgment is imprecise.


signal strength on the SDCCH.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the

SDCCH seizure duration is shorter than the TCH seizure

duration for the MS.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports that are used to clculate

the signal quality on speech/data TCHs.

The signal quality on TCHs should not be determined based on only one measurement

result. To eliminate the influence of accidental factors, you need to obtain the average

value of signal quality in several successive measurement reports of TCHs, and then

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of

accidental factors may be reduced but the judgment of

channel status may not be in time. If this parameter is set to

a lower value, the judgment is imprecise.



This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels

caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover

decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the

impact of sudden changes is reduced, and the system

response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink


The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower

the signal quality is.




interference exists. If this parameter is set to a small value,

the interference indication message will be reported even

though no interference exists.This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the downlink


The higher the level, the greater the signal strength is. The greater the value, the lower

the signal quality is.






though no interference exists.This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink


The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the

quality is.

If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level





though no interference exists.This parameter specifies one of the thresholds to determine whether the uplink


The higher the level, the greater the signal is. The greater the value, the lower the

quality is.

If the uplink channel level is greater than or equal to the value of Interf of UL level





though no interference exists.This parameter specifies whether the history record priority is considered in channel

assignment.

If this parameter is set to YES, the history record priority is effective. If this parameter is

set to NO, the history record priority is ineffective.

Usually this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high history record

None

This parameter specifies whether the TRX priority is considered during channel

assignment.

If this parameter is set to YES, the TRX priority factor is effective. If this parameter is set

to NO, the TRX priority factor is ineffective.

Usually, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with a high TRX priority

None

This parameter specifies whether the channel interference is considered in channel

assignment.

If this parameter is set to NO, the channel interference measurement is not performed

and the interference indication is not sent. If this parameter is set to YES, the channel

interference measurement is performed.

None

This parameter specifies whether the interference priority is considered during channel

assignment.

By default, this parameter is set to YES to select the channel with little interference.

None

In Huawei II channel assignment algorithm, if the current channel seizure ratio reaches

or exceeds this value, the half-rate TCH is assigned preferentially; otherwise, the full-

rate TCH is assigned preferentially.

None

This parameter specifies whether to turn on the switch for the tight BCCH algorithm,

and thus controls whether to enable the BCCH aggressive frequency reuse algorithm.

Yes: Open

No: Close

It is recommended not to use the TIGHT BCCH algorithm in

multiband network.

This parameter specifies whether the current cell supports the dynamic transmission

diversity or dynamic PBT:

0: not supported

1: dynamic transmission diversity supported

2: dynamic PBT supported

None

This parameter sets the priority of different types in channel allocation. These types

include:

Capacity with a higher priority

Quality with a higher priority

PS coordination with a relatively higher priority

None

This parameter specifies whether the combination of two half-rate TCHs into one full-

rate TCH is allowed in a cell.

If this parameter is set to No, the forced handover and call delay caused by timeslot

arrangement can be avoided, but there may cause some TCHF-only calls to fail because

the timeslot arrangement is unavailable.

Huawei recommends that the parameter Enhanced TCH

Adjust Allowed be set to No, the forced handover may fail

in the concentric cell. In a normal cell, Huawei recommends

that this parameter be set to Yes to ensure that the timeslot

arrangement can be performed in the cell.This parameter specifies the minimum time for the recovery of a TCH from an SDCCH.

The processing for the SDCCH recovered to the TCH is as follows: each cell is configured

with a counter. Each time the TCH is converted to the SDCCH, the counter is set to

ResTime. The value of the counter is adjusted every three seconds. If the number of idle

SDCCHs > 8 + N1, the counter descreases by 3; if the number of idle SDCCHs < 8 + Idle

If this parameter is set too small, it cannot correctly indicate

the idle state of the current SDCCHs and consequently the

rollback of SDCCHs immediately triggers adjustment and

affects the network performance.

If this parameter is set too large, the channel allocation

When the BSC determines whether to initiate the conversion from the TCH to the

SDCCH, it needs to determine whether the number of SDCCHs after the conversion

exceeds the Cell SDCCH Channel Maximum. If the number of SDCCHs exceeds the value

of this parameter, the BSC does not initiate the conversion.

If this parameter is set too small, the SDCCHs in the cell may

be insufficient and the dynamic adjustment cannot be

initiated, thus affecting the access of users. It is meaningless

to set the parameter too large.

If the number of idle SDCCHs in the cell is smaller than or equal to the value of this

parameter, the BSC tries to find a TCHF that can be converted to the SDCCH.

This parameter specifies one of the conditions for converting the TCHF to the SDCCH.

Besides this parameter, the other three conditions for initiating the conversion from

TCHFs to SDCCHs are as follows:

If this parameter is set too large and consequently there is a

small number of requests for SDCCHs, the SDCCHs of a cell

are in idle state;

If this parameter is set too small and consequently there is a

large number of requests for SDCCHs, the requests cannot

This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a half-rate channel when a call is

initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have

four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in

the ACS respectively.

The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates.

Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3.

The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR

ACS (F/H).

Based on the RQI in the call measurement report, the BTS and MS automatically adjust

the current speech coding rate according to the related algorithm. The coding rate

adjustment threshold is the threshold of RQI. The RQI indicates the carrier-to-

interference ratio (CIR) of the call. If RQI equals 1, the CIR is 0.5 dB; if RQI equals 2, the

CIR is 1 dB; and so forth. Since there are multiple coding rates in the ACS, there is an

None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None

This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a

set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech

coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is

1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding

rate. The value of this parameter has five bits.

Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the

ACS. The five bits represent the coding rates from 7.40

kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the

coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the

coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding

This parameter specifies the coding rate adopted on a full-rate channel when a call is

initially established. Since there are at most four coding rates in the ACS, this field have

four values 0, 1, 2, and 3, representing the lowest, low, high, and highest coding rates in

the ACS respectively.

The AMR ACS (F/H) contains at most four coding rates.

Therefore, the value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 3.

The values 0 to 3 match those of the coding rates of AMR

ACS (F/H).






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None






None

This parameter specifies the set of active coding rates. The active coding set (ACS) is a

set of coding rates currently available for calls. Use a BIT map to present the speech

coding rates contained in the ACS, wherein a BIT corresponds to a coding rate. If a bit is

1, the coding rate is included in the ACS. Otherwise, the ACS does not include the coding

rate. The value of this parameter has eight bits.

Each bit indicates whether a coding rate is contained in the

ACS. The eight bits represent the coding rates from 12.2

kbit/s to 4.75 kbit/s (from left to right). Bit 1 means that the

coding rate is contained in the ACS and bit 0 means that the

coding rate is not contained in the ACS. One to four coding

This parameter specifies the maximum number of reassignments after the assignment

on the Um interface fails.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the call completion

rate of MSs is increased and the QoS of the network is

improved. This, however, increases the load of the BSC.

In normal assignment procedure, after receiving the assignment failure message from

the MS on the SDCCH, the BSC does not report the message to the MSC immediately.

Instead, the BSC re-assigns radio channels and re-originates the assignment on the Um

interface. Thus the success rate of assignment can be increased.

Reassigning radio channels can be performed in the carriers with the same frequency

To improve the success rate of reassignment, it is

recommended that the default value Different Band be

used. That is, the frequency band of the preferentially

reassigned channel is different from what is used in the

original assignment.

This parameter specifies whether to disable the sending of point-to-point short

messages. In specific cells, sending point-to-point short messages on the downlink is

disabled to ensure sufficient radio channels for calls.

Pay special attention to the setting of this parameter during

an upgrade. If receiving short messages is allowed, this

parameter must be set to No.

If this parameter is set to Yes, MSs cannot receive short

messages.

The channel activation and immediate assignment commands are sent at the same time

to accelerate the signaling processing rate, thus improving the response speed of the

network.

In satellite transmission mode, this function can be enabled

to reduce the impact of the delay in satellite transmission

on the signaling processing rate. For terrestrial

transmission, the default value of this parameter is No.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Abis resource adjustment TCHH

function.

This parameter determines whether the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to an

MS when the Abis resources are insufficient.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC preferentially assigns a half-rate TCH to the

None

This parameter specifies whether to allow the enhanced multi-level precedence and

preemption (eMLPP) function. In eMLPP, the network can use different policies such as

queuing, preemption, and directed retry based on the priorities of different calls when

network resources are occupied.

If the Allow EMLPP is set to Yes, when preemption occurs, the MS with the lowest

The eMLPP supports a maximum of seven priorities (A, B,

and 0-4). The two highest priorities are reserved only for

local use in the network. Priorities 0-4 are used for

subscribers all over the world.

If the eMLPP function needs to be fully implemented, the

This parameter specifies whether to allow the reassignment function.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC initiates a re-

assignment when receiving an assignment failure message

from the Um interface. This helps to improve the call

completion rate and the QoS of the network. If there are a

large number of assignment failure messages, the BSC This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a TDD cell

is valid.

The measurement report is valid if the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement

report is greater than the value of this parameter.

After the valid measurement report is filtered, the TDD cell joins in the cell prioritization.

None

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a TDD cell.

Add the value of this parameter to the receive level of the TDD cell in the measurement

report, and then sequence the TDD cells.

0: 0 dB

1: 6 dB

None

This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN TDD cells that should be contained in the

best cell list or in the measurement report. None

A TDD cell can become a candidate cell only when the average receive level of the TDD

cell is greater than the TDD Cell Reselect Diversity of the serving cell.

0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable)

1: -28 dB

2: -24 dB

None

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about an FDD

cell is valid.

If the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report is greater than the value of

this parameter, the measurement report is valid.

After the valid measurement report is filtered, the 3G cell joins in the cell priority

None

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of an FDD cell.

When the priority of a 3G cell is sequenced, it is recommended that the value of this

parameter be added to the receive level of the 3G cell in the measurement report.

0: 0 dB

1: 6 dB

None

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a

DCS1800 cell is valid.

If the receive level of the 1800 MHz cell in the measurement report is greater than the

value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement report

is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority sequence.

None

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a DCS1800 cell.

When sequencing the priority of a DCS1800 cell based on its frequency band, the value

of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.

0: 0 dB

1: 6 dB

None

This parameter specifies the threshold for determining whether the MR about a

GSM900 cell is valid.

When the receive level of the GSM900 cell in the measurement report is greater than

the value of this parameter, the measurement report is valid. After the measurement

report is filtered, the cell joins in the cell priority rank.

None

This parameter specifies the signal level offset of a GSM900 cell.

When the priority of a GSM900 cell is sequenced on the basis of its frequency band, the

value of this parameter should be added to the receive level in the measurement report.

0: 0 dB

1: 6 dB

None

This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in connection mode.

In connection mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15],

the MS starts to search for 3G cells.

For example:

If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the

None

This parameter indicates that when the MS reports the EMR, it adds the value of this

parameter to the received signal level, and then converts the result into the RXLEV

value. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

If the SCALE_Order reported by the MS is 10 dBm, level values 0-63 map with -100 dBm

to -37 dBm.

None

This parameter specifies whether the EMR can contain the information about a cell with

an invalid BSIC. None

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to search for a 3G cell when the

BSIC must be decoded. None

This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in packet

transfer mode.

In packet transfer mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8,

15], the MS starts to search for 3G cells.

For example:

None

This parameter specifies one threshold of the signal level for 3G cell reselection.

Only when the receive level of a 3G cell is greater than FDD Qmin, the 3G cell can be one

candidate cell for cell reselection.

0: -20 dB

1: -6 dB

None

This parameter specifies the number of UTRAN FDD cells that should be contained in the

best cell list or in the measurement report.None

This parameter specifies the measurement report counter of an FDD cell.

Ec/No means Signal Noise Ratio in WCDMA. It maps with

C/I in GSM.

RSCP, Received Signal Code Power

Only when the average receive level of a 3G cell is FDD Q Offset greater than that of the

serving cell, the 3G cell becomes a candidate cell.

0: -∞ (always select a cell if acceptable)

1: -28 dB

2: -24 dB

None

This parameter specifies the threshold of the signal level for cell reselection in

connection mode before Qsearch C is obtained. None

This parameter specifies the level threshold for cell reselection in idle mode.

In idle mode, if the signal level in the serving cell is below [0, 7] or above [8, 15], the MS

starts to search for 3G cells.

For example:

If this parameter is set to 5 and if the signal level of the serving cell is lower than 5, the

None

If the system information indicates "MBR", the MS reports the number of neighbor cells

on different frequency bands.

When the MS reports the number of neighbor cells on the same frequency band with

the serving cell, a maximum of the value of Serving Band Reporting can be reported.

These neighbor cells must meet the following requirements:

Serving Band Reporting is valid if Report Type is set to EMR.

When Power Deviation Indication is set to Yes, the transmit power of an MS is the MS

maximum transmit power level plus the power calculated from the power deviation if

the class 3 MS on the DCS1800 band does not receive the original power command after

random access. For details, see GSM Rec. 05.08.

None

The MS does not receive the original power command after random access. This

parameter indicates whether the power deviation is added to the class 3 MS on the

DCS1800 band on the basis of the maximum MS transmit power.

None

This parameter is used for the MS to report neighbor cell explanation of multiple bands.

It is sent in the system information 2ter and 5ter.

In a multiple band network, this parameter can be set on

the basis of the traffic volume on each frequency band.

If this parameter is set to 0, the MS reports the

measurement results of six neighbor cells known and

permitted by the NCC at the bands with the best signal The early classmark sending control (ECSC) specifies whether the MSs in a cell use early

classmark sending. For details, see GSM Rec. 04.08.After a successful immediate

assignment, the MS sends additional classmark information to the network as early as

possible. The CM3 (classmark 3) information contains the power information of each

band of multi-band MSs. In the inter-band handover, power class must be correctly

For a 900/1800 MHz CoBCCH cell, it is recommended that

this parameter be set to Yes.

For a 1800 MHz cell in the dual-band network, it is

recommended that this parameter be set to Yes.

If the A5/4-7 encryption algorithm is used, it is

This parameter specifies when an MS disconnects a call if the MS unsuccessfully decodes

the SACCH message. For details of this parameter, see GSM Rec. 0408 and 05.08.

Once a dedicated channel is assigned to the MS, the counter S is enabled and the initial

value is set to this parameter value.

Each time an SACCH message is not decoded, the counter S decreases by 1. Each time

If this parameter is set to a small value, radio links are likely

to be faulty and therefore call drops occur.

If this parameter is set to a great value, a long time lasts

before an MS disconnects a call, and therefore resource

usage is low. This parameter takes effect on the downlink.

This parameter specifies whether to allow emergency calls. For MSs whose access class

is from 0 to 9, if this parameter is set to No, emergency calls are allowed.

For MSs whose access class is from 11 to 15, emergency calls are not allowed only when

the access control bit is set to 0 and Emergent Call Disable is set to Yes.

None

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of special access classes to access the

network. This parameter is used for load control. Value 1 indicates that access is not

allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.

For example, 000001 indicates that users of all classes except class 10 are allowed to

access the network. In the cell where the traffic volume is heavy, congestion may occur

This parameter can be used to control network load based

on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from

accessing the network. It is recommended that this

parameter be not used.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the MSs of common access classes to access

the network. This parameter is used for load control.

Value 1 indicates that access is not allowed. Value 0 indicates that access is allowed.For

example, 0000000001 indicates that the MSs of all classes except class 0 are allowed to

access the network.

This parameter can be used to control network load based

on the MS access classes, thus preventing some MSs from

accessing the network. It is recommended that this

parameter be not used.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of Channel Request messages that can

be sent by an MS in an immediate assignment procedure.

After the MS initiates the immediate assignment procedure, it always listens to the

messages on the BCCH and all the common control channels (CCCHs) in the CCCH group

to which the MS belongs.If the MS does not receive Immediate Assignment messages or

This parameter should be set as required: In the areas

where the traffic volume is low, this parameter can be set

to 4 or 7 to improve the success rate of MS access. In the

cells where congestion occurs or in the micro cells where

the traffic volume is high, it is recommended this parameter

This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions of the immediate

assignment message. When this number is reached, the immediate assignment

message is not retransmitted even if the Max Delay of Imm_Ass Retransmit (ms) is not

exceeded.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through

rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is

not obvious.

Within the period specified by this parameter, the immediate assignment message is

dispatched and retransmitted. Otherwise, the message is not dispatched or

retransmitted.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the put-through

rate of MS can be increased but the BSC load may increase.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the function is

not obvious.

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the immediate assignment

retransmission parameter to the BTS.

If the parameter is set to Yes, the immediate assignment

retransmission parameter is sent. If the parameter is set to

No, the immediate assignment retransmission parameter is

not sent.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the put-through rate of MS Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS

and MS. If the MS detects errors in an I frame, the BTS should resend the I frame.This

parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a full-

rate channel).

For the function of N200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the

None

Error control is performed on the I frame sent over the LAPDm layer between the BTS


parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the FACCH (a half-

rate channel).


None



parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SDCCH.



None



parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I on the SACCH.



None



parameter indicates the maximum retransmission times of frame I during the multi-

frame release.


None



parameter indicates the maximum number of retransmissions of the I frame.



None

This parameter specifies whether the BSC sends the LAPDm N200 parameter to the BTS.

Only the BTS3X in G3BTS32.30000.04.1130 or later and the

double-transceiver BTSs support the LAPDm N200

parameter.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC sends the LAPDm

N200 parameter. If this parameter is set to No, the BSC

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 when the SDCCH supports SAPI3

services.

For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of

the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.

If timer T200 is set to a too small value, the transmit end

may mistakenly regard that the link is faulty and the data

transmission fails before the transmit end receives a

response from the peer end. If timer N200 is set to a too

small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced

This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH on the

SDCCH.

For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of

the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.





small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um

interface when the TCH supports SAPI3 services. For details of the function of timer

T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)

parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message

services.





small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SACCH over the Um

interface when the TCH supports SAPI0 services. For details of the function of timer

T200 and the effect of the parameter, see the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms)

parameter. SAPI0 maps with speech services, and SAPI3 maps with short message

services.






This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHH over

the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see

the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.






This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the FACCH/TCHF over

the Um interface. For the function of timer T200 and the effect of the parameter, see

the descriptions of the T200 SDCCH (5 ms) parameter.





small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced This parameter specifies the expiry value of timer T200 used for the SDCCH over the Um

interface.

T200 prevents the data link layer from deadlock during data transmission. The data link

layer transforms the physical link that is vulnerable to errors into a sequential non-error

data link. The entities at the two ends of this data link use the acknowledgement





small value, the number of data retransmissions is reduced For the BTS3X in 03.0529 or later and the double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter

specifies the level threshold for the random access of the MS. If the receive level of the

RACH burst is smaller than the value of RACH Min.Access Level, the BTS regards this

access as an invalid one and no decoding is performed. If the receive level of the RACH

burst is greater than the value of RACH Min. Access Level, the BTS considers that an

Generally, this parameter is set to 1. It is set according to

the actual BTS receiver sensitivity and the minimum MS

access level. RACH Busy Threshold must be greater than

RACH Min.Access Level.

This parameter specifies the correlation between training sequences.

According the GSM protocols, the system determines whether the received signal is the

random access signal of an MS through the correlation between training sequences (41

bits) and calculates the TA value.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the allowable

error for the random access signal is high and an MS can

easily access the network. But the error report rate is high.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the error report

rate of the MS is low but the MS cannot easily access the This parameter specifies the following rules for TRX aiding function control:

TRX Aiding Not Allowed: The TRX aiding function is disabled.

Allowed & Recover Forbidden: The TRX aiding is allowed but the switchback is forbidden

after the faulty TRX is restored.

Allowed & Recover Immediately: The TRX aiding is enabled but the switchback is

This parameter specifies whether to enable the TRX aiding

function.

BCCH aiding: The main BCCH is aided to another normal

TRX in this cell.

BCCH aiding switchback: BCCH aiding switchback functions This parameter specifies the speech version supported by the BSC. The value of this

parameter has six bits.

The six bits (from the most significant bit to the least significant bit) indicate the

following speech versions respectively:

half-rate version 3, half-rate version 2, half-rate version 1, full-rate version 3, full-rate

None

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under half-rate AMR calls. For


The AMR coding has strong anti-interference capabilities.

Under the same frame erasure rate (FER), the AMR coding

supports a low C/I ratio compared with non-AMR coding. If

the AMR function is enabled, the speech quality is

improved. The value of AHR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH

This parameter specifies the value of Radio Link Timeout under full-rate AMR calls. For






improved. The value of AFR Radio Link Timeout(SACCH

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under half-rate AMR calls.

For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.





improved. The value of AHR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH

This parameter specifies the number of SACCH multi-frames under full-rate AMR calls.

For details, see the description of SACCH multi-frames.


Under the same frame erasion rate (FER), the AMR coding



improved. The value of AFR SACCH Multi-Frames(SACCH

This parameter is used to adjust candidate target cells for directed retry.

When target cells are selected during direct retry, only the cells whose loads are smaller

than or equal to the Directed Retry Load Access Threshold are selected as candidate

target cells.

If the value of the parameter is too high, the cells with

heavy loads are selected as candidate target cells so that

the handover does not make sense. If the value of the

parameter is too low, it is difficult to select candidate target

cells.

When Assignment Cell Load Judge Enabled is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is

started if the following two conditions are met: The cell supports directed try. The load

of the cell is greater than or equal to Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.

None

This parameter specifies the total number of paging times. The parameter and the

paging times configured on the MSC side together determine the number of

retransmissions of the paging message. The total paging times is approximately equal to

this parameter multiplied by the paging times configured on the MSC side. At present,

the Paging Times is set to 4 in the MSC. The BSC does not support the mechanism for

Properly setting this parameter can increase the paging

success rate. If this parameter is set to a too great value,

congestion may occur.

For the BTS3X series and double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter specifies the level

threshold for the MS random access when the BTS determines the RACH busy state.

When the receive level of the random access burst timeslot is greater than this

threshold, the BTS considers that the timeslot is busy. For the BTS3X series and the

double-transceiver BTSs, this parameter only indicates whether the timeslot is busy. The

For the BTS2X series (excluding the BTS24), this parameter

must be set according to the actual receiver sensitivity of

the BTS and the minimum access level of the MS to ensure

the balance between the uplink and the downlink. This

parameter also affects handover access of RACH BURST This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of radio link connection failure.

When the BTS receives the SACCH measurement report from the MS, the counter for

determining whether a radio link is faulty is set to the value of this parameter. Each time

the BTS fails to decode the SACCH measurement report sent by the MS, the counter

decreases by 1. If the BTS successfully decodes the SACCH measurement report, the

If the value of this parameter does not match with the value

supported by the BTS, an alarm is generated.

This parameter specifies the length of timer T3150. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58 and

04.08.

When the BTS sends physical information to the MS, the BTS starts the timer T3105.If

the timer T3105 expires before BTS receives the SAMB frame from MS, BTS resends

physical information to MS and restarts the timer T3105. The maximum times for

The physical information is sent over the FACCH. Four

TDMA frames are sent each time at the interval of 18 ms. If

the value of T3105 is smaller than or equal to 18 ms, the

BTS needs to retransmit the physical information to the MS

when the timer T3105 expires for the first time.If the This parameter specifies the maximum number of Physical information retransmissions.

Assume that the maximum number is Ny1. If the number of retransmissions exceeds

Ny1 before the BTS receives any correct SAMB frame from the MS, the BTS sends the

BSC a connection failure message, which can also be a handover failure message. After

receiving the message, the BSC releases the newly assigned dedicated channel and stops

The value of this parameter can be increased when

handover becomes slow or the handover success rate

decreases because of clock problems or poor

transmission.An MS can be handed over only when Max

Resend Times of Phy Info multiplied by Radio Link Timeout




This parameter can be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is

applied.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell

handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell

handover is triggered.


The greater the value of this parameter is set, the more

difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of TDD 3G better cell

handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a TDD 3G better cell




difficult the TDD 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

If both the Inter-System Handover Enable and the Better 3G Cell HO Allowed

parameters are set to Yes, a 3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an

adjacent 3G cell is greater than the TDD RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a

period of time. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110

dBm to -47 dBm).


difficult the 3G better cell handover can be triggered.

If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,

and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than

or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.

Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.


The greater the value of this parameter, the more difficult

for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier

for the BSC to hand over the MS to a TDD 3G cell.

This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a

3G cell.

During a handover decision, if this parameter is set to

Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC first selects the target

handover cell from the 2G candidate cells; If this parameter

is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC first selects the

target handover cell from the 3G candidate cells; If this

During a measurement period, a fast handover occurs only if the difference of path loss

between a chain neighbor cell and the serving cell is greater than or equal to the value

of this parameter.

The level values 0 to 127 map with -64 dB to 63 dB.

None

This parameter specifies the penalty that is performed on the downlink level of the

original serving cell after a successful fast handover.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to

be handed over to the original serving cell, thus leading to

ping-pong handovers.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is


This parameter specifies the duration of penalty that is performed on the original

serving cell after a successful fast handover.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the MS is likely to


ping-pong handovers.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the MS is


This parameter specifies the allowed number of invalid measurement reports when the

BSC uses the measurement reports for filtering. If the number of received measurement

reports is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, no filtering is performed

and no fast handover decision is made.

This parameter can only be applied to the fast-moving

handover.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the

BSC receives the measurement reports of the adjacent cell from the BTS. This helps to

avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the filtered

value is more accurate, but the time delay is longer. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the filtered value is

inaccurate.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for filtering after the

BSC receives the measurement reports of the serving cell from the BTS. This helps to

avoid improper handover decision based on a single inaccurate measurement report.




inaccurate.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions

of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion, that is, the period during which

the triggering conditions of fast handover are met. Such a period is within the value

defined by this parameter.


difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

The fast handover must comply with the P/N criterion. That is, the triggering conditions

of fast handover must be met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion. That is, if the triggering conditions

of fast handover is met for a period longer than or equal to the value of this parameter,

a fast handover is triggered.


difficult the fast-moving handover can be triggered.

During a measurement period, if the MS moves at a speed greater than the value of this

parameter, a fast handover is triggered. None

During a measurement period, if the compensated downlink level of the serving cell is

smaller than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.


None

During a measurement period, if the filtered uplink level of the serving cell is smaller

than the value of this parameter, a fast handover is triggered.


None

During the UL subcell to the OL subcell handover in the enhanced dualband network, if

the traffic load in the OL subcell is higher than the Inner Cell Serious Overload Threshold,

a load handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell cannot be triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the traffic load

in the UL subcell is increased.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband

handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding

handover decision is triggered.


None

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of enhanced dualband

handover are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, the corresponding

handover decision is triggered.


None

After a handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell is successful, no handover

can be triggered within the period defined by this parameter.None

This parameter specifies the level step of the load handover from the OL subcell to the

UL subcell.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow

load is increased.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the

OL subcell to the UL subcell.

In Enhanced dualband If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is lower than the UL

Subcell Lower Load Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the

same time and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow

load is increased.

This parameter specifies whether the load handover from the OL subcell to the UL

subcell is enabled. None

If the traffic load of the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell serious overload

threshold, the handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the

value of this parameter per second on the basis of UL subcell load hierarchical HO

period.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system flow

load is increased.

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the UL

subcell to the OL subcell. None

This parameter specifies the hierarchical handover period of the load handover from the

UL subcell to the OL subcell.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the UL subcell general

overload threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time and

the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the target

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the system flow

load is increased.

To prevent ping-pong handovers, this parameter should be decided before the

handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell. Suppose the signal strength of serving

cell is SS(s) and the signal strength of the adjacent cell is SS(n). The decision condition

for a handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is as follows: SS(s) - SS(n) < Distance

between Boundaries of UL And OL Subcells - Distance Hysterisis Between Boudaries of


difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL

subcell can be triggered.

This parameter is a relative value, which specifies the size of blank zone between the UL

subcell and the OL subcell. The greater the value of this parameter is, the larger the

blank zone is.

For the enhanced dualband handover algorithm, the boundaries of the OL and UL

subcells are determined according to the relative value between the signal strength of


difficult the handover between the OL subcell and the UL

subcell can be triggered.

If the flow control level in the current system is greater than the value of this parameter,

the handover between the UL subcell and the OL subcell due to low or high UL subcell

load is not allowed.

If this parameter is set to a too great or too low value, load

balancing between the OL subcell and UL subcell is

adversely affected.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is greater than the value of this parameter,

the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value

of Step length of UL subcell load HO(dB) per second on the basis of UL subcell load

hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the traffic load



in the OL subcell is increased.


some calls of the UL subcell is handed over to the OL subcell. Moreover, the MS that

sends the channel request message in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to the OL

subcell.





This parameter specifies whether the channel request in the OL subcell is preferentially

processed over the channel request the UL subcell according to the UL Subcell Lower

Load Threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is lower than the UL Subcell Lower

Load Threshold, the MS access to the OL subcell is preferentially assigned to the UL

subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

None

This parameter specifies whether the access request in the UL subcell is preferentially

processed over the access request in OL subcell according to the UL subcell general

overload threshold. If the traffic load in the UL subcell is higher than the UL subcell

general overload threshold, the MS access to the UL subcell is preferentially assigned to

the OL subcell. This parameter is applied to the enhanced dualband cell.

None

In an enhanced dualband cell, if TCH seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the

value of this parameter, some calls of the OL subcell is handed over to the UL subcell.

Moreover, the MS that sends the channel request message in the OL subcell is

preferentially assigned to the UL subcell.








This parameter must be set to Yes when 2G/3G network is

applied.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are

met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.




According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of 3G better cell handover are

met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a 3G better cell handover is triggered.




If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a

3G better cell handover is triggered when the Ec/No of an adjacent 3G cell is greater

than Ec/No Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.

The level values 0 to 49 map to -24 dB to 0 dB.



If both Inter-System Handover Enable and Better 3G Cell HO Allowed are set to Yes, a

3G better cell handover is triggered when the RSCP of an adjacent 3G cell is greater than

RSCP Threshold for Better 3G Cell HO during a period of time.The value of this

parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm to -47 dBm).



If the Inter-RAT HO Preference parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell By Threshold,

and if the receive level of the first candidate cell among 2G candidate cells is lower than

or equal to the HO Preference Threshold for 2G Cell, the 3G cell handover is preferred.

Otherwise, the 2G cell handover is preferred.


The greater the value of this parameter is, the more difficult

for the BSC to hand over the MS to a 2G cell and the easier

for the BSC to hand over the MS to an FDD 3G cell.

This parameter specifies whether an MS is preferentially handed over to a 2G cell or to a

3G cell.

During the handover decision:

If this parameter is set to Preference for 2G Cell, the BSC

first selects the target handover cell from the 2G candidate

cells.

If this parameter is set to Preference for 3G Cell, the BSC

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the UL subcell

to the OL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.None

This parameter specifies the receive level threshold of the handover from the OL subcell

to the UL subcell of the PS service in the PS concentric algorithm.None

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR HR voice service. It is

used in concentric cell handover decision. The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to

70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality level 0-7) x 10.

None

This parameter specifies the receive quality threshold of the AMR FR voice service. It is

used in concentric cell handover decision.

The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 70, corresponding to RQ (receive quality

level 0-7) x 10.

None

This parameter specifies the hierarchical level step of the load handover from the OL

subcell to the UL subcell.


in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share

the traffic.

If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is higher than the En Iuo Out Cell General

OverLoad Threshold, all the calls in the cell send handover requests at the same time

and the load on the BSC increases in a short time. Thus, congestion may occur in the

target cell and call drops may be caused. Through the hierarchical load handover

algorithm, the calls in the cell are handed over to the target cell by level.


in the UL subcell is heavy, and the OL subcell cannot share

the traffic.


the load handover period from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is decreased by the value

of Modified step length of UL load HO period per second on the basis of UL subcell load

hierarchical HO period, thus speeding up the load handover from the UL subcell to the

OL subcell.

This parameter must be set to a value that is greater than or

equal to the En Iuo Out Cell General OverLoad Threshold.


some calls in the UL subcell are handed over to the OL subcell.





If the channel seizure ratio of the UL subcell is smaller than the value of this parameter,

some calls in the OL subcell are handed over to the UL subcell.





When deciding whether a call can be handed over from the UL subcell to the OL subcell,

the BSC determines whether the number of handover failures reaches the MaxRetry

Time after UtoO Fail. If the number reaches the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail, the UL

subcell to OL subcell handover is prohibited during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail.

Otherwise, the UL subcell to OL subcell handover is allowed.

When the MaxRetry Time after UtoO Fail is set to 0, no

penalty related to retry times after UtoO handover failure is

imposed. That is, the call can still be handed over to the

previous target cell after the penalty time.

After an OL subcell to UL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the

OL subcell to the UL subcell during the Penalty Time after OtoU HO Fail. None

After a UL subcell to OL subcell handover fails, the call cannot be handed over from the

UL subcell to the OL subcell during the Penalty Time after UtoO HO Fail. None

If handover penalty is enabled, when a call is handed over from the OL subcell to the UL

subcell, it cannot be handed over back to the OL subcell during Penalty Time of UtoO HO

to avoid ping-pong handovers.

If this parameter is set to 0, handover penalty is not performed on the OL subcell to the

UL subcell handover.



During the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell, the calls are hierarchically

handled from level 63 to 0. Therefore, the calls with higher receive level can be handed

over to the OL subcell first.

The handover strip is decreased by Underlay HO Step Level every Underlay HO Step

Period.



When multiple requests for the UL-to-OL handover are sent simultaneously, calls with

lower level may be handed over first. This does not conform to the principle that the call

of the best quality should be handed over preferentially.

Therefore, the hierarchy handover algorithm is adopted to hand over the calls with

higher RX level from the UL subcell to OL subcell. The value of this parameter is the time



This parameter determines whether the traffic load in the UL subcell determines the UL

subcell to OL subcell handover or the OL subcell to UL subcell handover in an enhanced

concentric cell.

When this parameter is set to Yes,

If the call is in the OL subcell and if the OL to UL HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the

None

This parameter is one of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell

and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL

subcell and UL subcell is determined by UtoO HO Received Level Threshold, OtoU HO

Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.



and UL subcell of an enhanced concentric cell.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to Yes, the coverage of the OL

subcell and UL subcell is determined by OtoU HO Received Level Threshold, UtoO HO

Received Level Threshold, RX_QUAL Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis.


In a concentric cell, the channel assignment for an incoming-BSC handover can be

processed in one of the following modes:



No Preference: A channel is assigned according to general channel assignment

For the network with a single frequency band, inter-BSC

handovers are triggered at the edge of two adjacent cells.

Therefore, the recommended value of this parameter is

Underlaid Subcell. For a dual-band network (for example,

900/1800 MHz cells), incoming BSC handovers occur In a concentric cell, an intra-BSC incoming cell handover request can be processed in

one of the following modes:

System Optimization: The measurement level on the BCCH of the target cell is added to

the intra-BSC inter-cell handover request messages. Then, the BSC compares the

measurement value with RX_LEV Threshold, and determines the preferred service layer.

None

If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel

request message is lower than TA Threshold of Imme-Assign Pref., a channel in the OL

subcell is preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment. Otherwise, a

channel in the UL subcell is preferentially assigned.

None

This parameter specifies whether a channel is assigned based on the access_delay in the

channel request message during an immediate assignment.

If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to No, a channel in the UL subcell is

preferentially assigned during the immediate assignment.

If TA Pref. of Imme-Assign Allowed is set to Yes and the access_delay in the channel

None

If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current

receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on

the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then,

the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be

assigned based on the result of comparing the receive level on the SDCCH and Assign-

When TA Threshold of Assignment Pref. is set to 0, the TCH

in the OL subcell cannot be assigned preferentially to the

MS because no TA is lower than this threshold. In this case,

Assign Optimum Layer is set to Underlaid Subcell.

If the Assign Optimum Layer parameter is set to System Optimization, the current

receive level on the SDCCH can be estimated (by interpolating and filtering) based on

the uplink measurement value in the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH. Then,

the BSC determines whether a TCH in the UL subcell or in the OL subcell should be

assigned based on the result of comparing the uplink receive level on the SDCCH and

None

In a concentric cell, the TCH can be assigned in the following modes:

System Optimization: Based on the measurement reports sent on the SDCCH, the BSC

determines which service layer should be preferentially selected.

Underlaid Subcell: The TCH in the UL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.

Overlaid Subcell: The TCH in the OL subcell are preferentially assigned to an MS.

None

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover

are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is

triggered.



difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the triggering conditions of concentric cell handover

are met for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a concentric cell handover is

triggered.



difficult the concentric cell handover can be triggered.


and UL subcell.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL

subcell and UL subcell is determined by TA Hysteresis, RX_LEV Threshold, RX_LEV

Hysteresis, RX_QUAL Threshold, and TA Threshold.

Check whether the concentric cell is an enhanced

concentric cell. The coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL

subcell is determined by different factors.

#N/A #N/A

One of the parameters that determine the coverage of the OL subcell and of the UL

subcell. RX_QUAL Threshold = RQ (ranging from level 0 to level 7) x 10.

If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed parameter is set to No, the coverage of the OL


Threshold, TA Threshold, and TA Hysteresis. If the Enhanced Concentric Allowed

None


and UL subcell.








and UL subcell.







UO Signal Intensity Difference = UO Amplifier Power Difference + Combiner Insertion

Loss Difference + Path Loss Difference of Different Antennas + Pass Loss Difference of

Different Frequencies.

Measure the receive level of the UL subcell and OL subcell at several different places if

the UL subcell and OL subcell use different antennas. The recommended number of




This parameter specifies whether the TA is used as a decisive condition for the

concentric cell handover. None

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive quality is used as a decisive

condition for the concentric cell handover. None

This parameter specifies whether the downlink receive level is used as a decisive

condition for the concentric cell handover. None

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the OL subcell to the UL subcell is

enabled. None

This parameter specifies whether the handover from the UL subcell to the OL subcell is

enabled. None

This parameter specifies the load threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To trigger an

intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover, the load of the non-BCCH frequencies should be higher

than the Load Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

None

This parameter specifies the signal quality threshold of the TIGHT BCCH handover. To

trigger an intra-cell TIGHT BCCH handover from a TCH to a BCCH, the downlink receive

quality should be lower than the RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO.

None

This parameter specifies the K offset used in K ranking.

To reduce the ping-pong effect in an handover, you are advised to subtract K Bias from

the actual downlink receive level of the candidate cells before ranking their downlink

receive level based on the K principle.

Subtract K Bias from the actual downlink receive level of the

candidate cells before ranking their downlink receive level

based on the K principle. This parameter affects the ranking

of candidate cells. Generally, it is set to 0.

This parameter specifies the expected uplink receive level on a new channel after an MS

is handed over to a new cell. This parameter is used for the MS Power Prediction after

HO. This parameter should be consistent with the UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold in

Huawei II power control algorithm, thus ensuring a relatively high uplink receive level on

the new channel after handover, increasing the transmit power of the MS, and avoiding

If this parameter is set to a too small value, call drop may

easily occur.

This parameter specifies the period in which penalty is performed on the adjacent cells

of the cell where a fast-moving MS is located. The adjacent cells must be located at the

Macro, Micro, or Pico layer other than the Umbrella layer.

Penalty can be performed on only the cell that is not

located at the fourth layer.

If an MS is moving fast, the BSC performs penalty on the adjacent cells of the cell where

the MS is located. This parameter specifies the penalty value. Only when the MS is

located at the Umbrella layer and the adjacent cells are located at the Macro, Micro, or

Pico layer, penalty is performed.

This parameter is valid within only the Penalty Time on Fast Moving HO.

None

The two intra-cell handovers that occur during the period specified by this parameter

are regarded as consecutive handovers.

This parameter, together with Forbidden time after MAX

Times, determines the frequency of intra-cell handovers.

When the number of consecutive intra-cell handovers reaches the maximum allowed, a

timer is started to forbid the intra-cell handover.

Intra-cell handovers are allowed only when the timer expires.

This parameter to used to disable the intra-cell handover

for a certain period.

This parameter determines the maximum number of consecutive intra-cell handovers

allowed.

If the interval of two continuous intra-cell handovers is shorter than a specified

threshold, the two handovers are regarded as consecutive handovers. If multiple

consecutive intra-cell handovers occur, the intra-cell handover is forbidden for a period.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the intra-cell

handover may not be timely; if this parameter is set to a too

great value, the system resources may be wasted when

intra-cell handovers occur frequently.

The time threshold is calculated based on the cell radius (r) and the velocity (v). The

threshold equals 2r/v. If the time taken by an MS to pass a cell is smaller than this

threshold, the MS is regarded as moving fast. Otherwise, the MS is regarded as moving

slow.

When the cell radius is fixed, the smaller the value of this

parameter is (the required velocity is higher), the more the

difficult fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be

triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the

BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter

corresponds to N of the P/N criterion.

The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult

the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be

triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the MS fast passes N cells among the P micro cells, the

BSC starts to trigger a fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover. This parameter

corresponds to P of the P/N criterion.

The more the micro cells are configured, the more difficult

the fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover can be

triggered.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the system

traffic volume cannot be reduced effectively; if this In hierarchical load handover, the handover strip increases by one Load HO Step Level

for every Load HO Step Period, starting from the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold. The

handovers are performed as such until all the calls whose receive levels are within the

range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO

Bandwidth) are handed off the current serving cell.

The setting of this parameter affects the width of the

handover strip during load handover.

When the load of the cell is equal to or greater than the Load HO Threshold, all the calls

served by the cell may send handover requests simultaneously, and the load on the CPU

will increase rapidly as a consequence. In some cases, call drops may occur due to traffic

congestion in the cell. Therefore, the hierarchical handover algorithm for load handover

is used for the BSC to control the number of users to be handed over by levels.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover

time. If it is set to a too greater value, the handover time of

each level is long.

The setting of this parameter is dependent on the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold

parameter.

Only when the receive level of the serving cell is within the range of (Edge HO DL RX_LEV

Threshold, Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold + Load HO Bandwidth), a load handover is

allowed.

The setting of this parameter determines the maximum

width of the handover strip during load handover.

If the cell load is smaller than the value of this parameter, the cell can receive the MSs

handed over from other cells. Otherwise, the cell rejects the MSs handed over from

other cells.

The setting of this parameter affects the load handover

targeted to the cell. If it is set to a lower value, the number

of handover requests that are rejected increases.

When Load HO Allowed is set to Yes, Load HO Threshold should be set to 85.

The traffic load of a cell refers to the TCH seizure rate in the cell.

The load handover is triggered when the traffic load in a cell is greater than the value of

this parameter. In other words, the load handover is triggered when the ratio of TCHs

occupied in a cell reaches the threshold defined for load handover.

The setting of this parameter affects the triggering of the

load handover. If it is set to a lower value, the number of

load handovers increases.

System flux thresholds correspond to the system flux obtained based on message

packets, CPU load, and FID queuing load. The system flux level is the current flux control

level of the system.

0-11: There are 12 flow control levels. Where, 0 indicates the lowest level and 11

indicates the highest level.

The value of this parameter should not be set too high.

Load handover is allowed only when the system flow is

lower than the setting of this parameter. Otherwise, the

load on the system is increased.





handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,

the uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.


emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS

is greater than the value of this parameter.


handover of AMR HR calls. If it is set to a too small value,

the downlink BQ handover is easily triggered.






uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.


emergency handover can be triggered only when the downlink receive quality of the MS

is greater than the value of this parameter.




This parameter specifies the quality level offset of the interface handover of the AMR FR

service relative to non-AMR services or the AMR HR service (x 10). When determining

whether an interference handover should be triggered, the system compares the

receive quality of the MS minus the RXLEVOff with the handover threshold.

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn, is used in interference

For the AMR calls, this parameter, together with RXQUALn,

is used in interference handover decision. An uplink

interference handover is easily triggered if this parameter is

set to a small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is greater than or equal to 63, and if the uplink or

downlink receive quality of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the

value of this parameter, uplink interference or downlink interference exists.




set to a too small value.

If the receive level of the serving cell is in the range of 59 to 62, and if the uplink or































































If the receive level of the serving cell is 31, and if the uplink or downlink receive quality

of the non-AMR FR voice service is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter,

uplink interference or downlink interference exists.





If the receive level of the serving cell is smaller than or equal to 30, and if the uplink or







If the number of consecutive measurement reports without the downlink measurement

report is smaller than or equal to the value of this parameter, the handover decision

related to no downlink measurement report is allowed.

If the number of consecutive measurement reports without

the downlink measurement report is greater than the value

of this parameter, the handover decision related to no

downlink measurement report is not performed. Therefore,

if this parameter is set to a lower value, the no downlink If the downlink MRs are not included in the MRs received, and if the uplink receive

quality is greater than or equal to the value of this parameter, a no downlink

measurement report emergency handover is triggered.

When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover is preferentially

selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell is available

The handover decision is allowed only when the uplink

receive quality is greater than or equal to the value of this

parameter. Therefore, if this parameter is set to a higher

value, the no downlink measurement report handover

cannot be triggered.This parameter is used to control the no downlink measurement report handover

algorithm.


disabled. Therefore, handover decision related to no downlink measurement report is

not allowed in this cell.

This parameter is set according to the traffic volume.

This parameter is used for configuring the filter for the rapidly dropped receive level.

This parameter indicate specifies the drop trend of the receive level within a period.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level drop is required for

triggering a rapid level drop handover. This parameter is used together with the Filter

Parameters A1 to A8.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a more rapid level

drop is required for triggering a rapid level drop handover.


Together with filter parameter B, it is one of the nine filter parameters. The

corresponding formula is as follows (in the program, the value of A1 to A8 can be

obtained by subtracting 10 from the configured value, and B is the negative value of the

configured value):

Filter parameters A1 to A8 must meet the following

requirement: A1 + A2 + A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 + A8 = 80.

The settings of A1 to A8 reflect the number of MRs in which

the receive level drops rapidly.





configured value):









configured value):









configured value):









configured value):









configured value):









configured value):









configured value):





This parameter specifies the uplink quality threshold of an emergency handover. An

emergency handover due to bad quality is triggered when the uplink receive quality is

greater than or equal to the UL Qual. Threshold.

When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be

preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell



uplink BQ handover is easily triggered.

This parameter specifies the downlink receive quality threshold of an emergency

handover. An emergency handover is triggered when the downlink receive quality is

greater than or equal to the DL Qual. Threshold.

When an emergency handover is triggered, an inter-cell handover should be

preferentially selected. An intra-cell handover, however, is triggered if no candidate cell




An emergency handover is triggered when TA is greater than or equal to the value of

this parameter.

This parameter determines the cell coverage for the TA

emergency handover. In the areas with small space

between BTSs and densely distributed BTSs, the coverage of

the cell can be reduced if this parameter is set to a lower

value.

This parameter is used as a switch to control the value determination method of

measurement reports. When this parameter is set to Open, if DTX is used, the SUB

values in the MR should be selected. Otherwise, the PULL values in the MR should be

selected.

When this parameter is set to 0 and if the measurement

report indicates that DTX is not used, the FULLSET values

should be selected. When this parameter is set to 0 and if

the measurement report indicates that DTX is used, the

SUBSET values should be selected. In latter cases, the

This parameter specifies the value of the timer used for adjacent cell penalty after

handover failure due to data configuration.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the target cell

for the previous handover will not be selected for the next

handover, but the probability of call drop increases. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the probability of

handover failure increases.


handover failure due to the Um interface error.







handover failure due to cell congestion.






When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the TCH

NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.

By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus

avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.




inaccurate. Once set, this parameter should not be

modified.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the filter length for the SDCCH

NBR_RCVD_BLOCK.

By setting this parameter, you can use the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in multiple EMRs, thus

avoiding the case that the NBR_RCVD_BLOCK in a single EMR is inaccurate.




This parameter specifies the penalty time for AMR full rate to half rate (FR-to-HR)

handovers. Before the timer expires, no AMR FR-to-HR handover is allowed if the

previous FR-to-HR handover fails due to channel unavailability or channel mismatch.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the penalty time after AMR TCHF-

H HO Fail is. In other words, triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.

The greater the value of this parameter is, the longer the

penalty time after AMR TCHF-H HO Fail is. In other words,

triggering AMR handover becomes more difficult.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the

TCH REP_QUANT.

By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding

the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.





modified.

When the Report Type is EMR, this parameter specifies the length of the filter for the

SDCCH REP_QUANT.

By setting this parameter, you can use the REP_QUANT in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding

the case that the REP_QUANT in a single EMR is inaccurate.




This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for

averaging the CV_BEP on the TCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the

case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.





modified.This parameter specifies the number of enhanced measurement reports used for

averaging the CV_BEP on the SDCCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the CV_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding the

case that the CV_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.

This parameter should be set to a small value because the SDCCH seizure duration is





averaging the MEAN_BEP on the TCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding

the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.





modified.


averaging the MEAN_BEP on the SDCCH.

By setting this parameter, you can use the MEAN_BEP in multiple EMRs, thus avoiding

the case that the MEAN_BEP in a single EMR is inaccurate.




This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original serving cell

after an emergency handover due to timing advance is performed.

After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original

serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority

and handover to the original serving cell is not allowed.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the MS is likely to


ping-pong handovers. If this parameter is set to a higher

value, the MS is unlikely to be handed over to the original

serving cell.This parameter specifies the penalty on the signal strength of the original serving cell to

avoid ping-pong handovers after an emergency handover due to the timing advance.

This parameter is valid only within the Penalty Time after TA HO.

After an emergency handover is performed due to TA, the receive level of the original

serving cell is decreased by the penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority





serving cell. This parameter specifies the duration of the penalty imposed on the original cell where

an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated.

During the penalty time, the receive level of the original serving cell is decreased by the

penalty level. Thus, other cells are given higher priority and handover to the original

serving cell is not allowed.





serving cell.This parameter specifies the degree of penalty imposed on the original serving cell

where an emergency handover associated with bad signal quality is initiated. This

parameter is defined to avoid ping-pong handover and is valid only within the Penalty

Time after BQ HO.

After an emergency handover is performed due to bad quality, the receive level of the





serving cell.

This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on the target cell.

This parameter is valid only within the duration of the cell penalty time.


This parameter specifies the penalty level imposed on a

target cell. A penalty level is imposed on a target cell to

avoid further attempts when a handover fails due to any of

the following reasons: cell congestion, a message indicating

internal handover refusal is received, a message indicating This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports used for averaging the

timing advance.

The TA value in a single MR may be inaccurate. You can set this parameter to average

the TA value in multiple MRs. The average TA value serves as the basis for handover

decision.


sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is

delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.


neighbor cells. This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by

Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover decisions.

When this parameter is set to an excessive value, the


response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is

degraded.


channel quality on the SDCCH.





signal strength on the SDCCH.






This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels caused by Raileigh Fading and

to ensure correct handover decisions.


sudden changes is reduced, and the system response is

delayed. Thus, the network performance is degraded.



This parameter helps to avoid sharp drop of signal levels

caused by Raileigh Fading and to ensure correct handover

decisions. When this parameter is set to a higher value, the


response is delayed. Thus, the network performance is This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost during

interpolation.

If the number of consecutive MRs that are lost is equal to or smaller than the value of

this parameter, the linear interpolation processing of the lost MRs is performed

according to two consecutive MRs that are lost.

Measurement reports fail to be decoded correctly when the

signal strength in the serving cell is poor. When the number

of consecutive MRs that are lost is greater than the value of

this parameter, all previous measurement reports are

discarded and the handover may fail. Therefore, Huawei

This parameter is used to select the candidate cells during directed retry. If the receive

level of an adjacent cell is greater than the value of this parameter, the adjacent cell can

be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry. The level values 0 through 63 map to -

110 dBm to -47 dBm.

If the receive level of an adjacent cell is greater than or

equal to the value of this parameter, this adjacent cell can

be selected as a candidate cell for directed retry.

This parameter specifies the frequency at which the BTS sends the preprocessed MR to

the BSC. After preprocessing the MRs, the BTS sends the preprocessed MRs to the BSC.

For example, if this parameter is set to Twice every second, the BTS sends preprocessed

MRs to the BSC every 0.5 second.

This parameter should be set on the basis of the data rate

and flow on the Abis interface. If the preprocessed MR is

sent at a high frequency, the flow on the Abis interface is

increased.

This parameter specifies whether the BS/MS power class should be transferred from the

BTS to the BSC.

When MR preprocessing is enabled, the UL and DL balance

measurement is affected if Transfer BS/MS Power Class is

set to No. In addition, the handovers (such as PBGT

handovers, load handovers, and concentric cell handovers)

that require power compensation may fail.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should send the original measurement report

to the BSC. If this parameter is set to Yes, the BTS should send the preprocessed MR and

the original MR to the BSC.

In 4:1 multiplexing mode, if there are more than two

timeslots configured in SDCCH/8 scheme, then this

parameter should be set to No.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS should preprocess MRs. This parameter

determines whether transmit power is controlled by the BTS or by the BSC. This

parameter is set to YES if power control is performed by the BTS. This parameter is set

to NO if power control is performed by the BSC.

When this parameter is set to NO, the BSC preprocesses the

measurement reports. In this case, the Transfer Original

MR, Transfer BS/MS Power Class, and Sent Freq.of

preprocessed MR parameters are invalid.

When this parameter is set to YES, the signaling on the Abis

This parameter specifies whether an MS can use the optimum transmit power instead

of the maximum transmit power to access the new channel after a handover. The

purpose is to minimize system interference and improve signal quality.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS does not use the

maximum transmit power, and thus the handover success

rate is decreased, but the network interference is reduced.

This parameter specifies whether to penalize the target cell where a handover fails or

the serving cell where the TA is too great or the signal quality is too bad.

If the target cell is congested and an incoming cell handover fails, a penalty is performed

on the target cell to avoid the handover of the MS to the cell.

When the TA is great or the signal quality is bad, ping-pong handovers are likely to

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. If

you need to disable the penalty for a certain handover, set

the related penalty time and penalty level to 0.

This parameter specifies whether to allow the inter-BSC SDCCH handover.

After the handover prohibition time for the initial access of an MS, the MS can be

handed over to another SDCCH in another BSC before a TCH is assigned.

This parameter should be set to Yes if the inter-BSC SDCCH

handover is allowed.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive emergency

handovers. No emergency handover is allowed during the minimum interval.

When the conditions for an emergency handover are met, an emergency handover

timer is started. Another emergency handover decision can be made only when the

timer expires.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent

handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a

too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive handovers. No

handover is allowed during the minimum interval.

A timer starts after a handover is complete, and a subsequent handover is allowed only

after the timer expires. The value of this parameter is the length of the timer. The

parameter is used to avoid frequent handovers.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, frequent

handovers cannot be avoided. If this parameter is set to a

too great value, handovers cannot be performed timely.

After a new SDCCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel

only if the time during which the MS occupies the SDCCH is longer than the period

specified by this parameter.

This parameter is used to avoid unwanted handovers due to

inaccurate measurement reports generated in the initial

phase of call establishment.

If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you

can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed

After a new TCH is assigned to an MS, the MS can be handed over to another channel

only if the time during which the MS occupies the TCH is longer than the period

specified by this parameter.

This parameter can be used to avoid unwanted handovers

due to inaccurate measurement reports in the initial phase

of call establishment.

If measurement reports are processed on the BTS side, you

can set Report Frequency of the Preprocessed This parameter specifies the switch of the ATCB handover algorithm. The ATCB

handover algorithm can determine the coverage areas of the OL subcell and the UL

subcell and balance the load between the OL subcell and the UL subcell and between

the UL subcell and the adjacent subcell according to the actual networking. It can

decrease the interference, improve the conversation quality, and achieve the aggressive

None

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.


frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT

BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the

RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the

cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.

This parameter corresponds to P of the P/N criterion for the TIGHT BCCH handover.


frequency is higher than the Load Threshold for TIGHT

BCCH HO, the MS with conversation quality higher than the

RX_QUAL Threshold for TIGHT BCCH HO and far from the

cell edge is handed over to the TCH on the BCCH frequency.

This parameter specifies whether the quick handover is enabled.

0: NO; 1: YES None

This parameter specifies the threshold of the half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover.

When an AMR call occupies a half-rate TCH, an intra-cell half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH

handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains lower than the

configured H2F HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.

The lower the value of this parameter is set, the more

difficult the AMR half-rate TCH to full-rate TCH handover

can be triggered.

This parameter specifies the threshold of the full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover.

When an AMR call occupies a full-rate TCH, an intra-cell full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH

handover is triggered if the radio quality indication (RQI) remains higher than the

configured F2H HO Threshold for a predefined period. This parameter is used with the

Intracell F-H HO Stat Time and the Intracell F-H HO Last Time.


difficult the AMR full-rate TCH to half-rate TCH handover

can be triggered.

The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,

the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N

consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.

This parameter corresponds to N of the P/N criterion. The triggering conditions of the

intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are the F2H HO Threshold or the H2F HO


difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

This parameter determines the period during which the triggering conditions of the intra-

cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met.

The intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover must conform to the P/N criterion. That is,

the triggering conditions of the intra-cell full-rate to half-rate handover are met for N

consecutive seconds with P measurement seconds.


difficult the AMR handover can be triggered.

This parameter specifies whether the AMR handover is enabled. This parameter does

not affect the dynamic non-AMR full-rate to half-rate handover.

The AMR handover can be triggered only when the Intracell

F-H HO Allowed parameter is set to Yes.

The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of downlink receive level of an

adjacent cell.

Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum downlink power of the

candidate cell for handover + Minimum access level offset)

The M criterion is met if the Filtered uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Minimum


number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too

great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the

candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,

an unwanted cell may become the candidate cell. This leads The M criterion supports the minimum value constraint of uplink receive level of the

adjacent cell.

Expected uplink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min UP Power on HO Candidate Cell + Min

Access Level Offset)

The M criterion is met if the Filtered downlink level of the adjacent cell >= (Min DL


number of candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too

great value, some desired cells may be excluded from the

candidate cells. If this parameter is set to a too small value,

an unwanted cell may become the target cell. This leads to This parameter specifies the hysteresis of an inter-layer or inter-priority handover. This

parameter is used to avoid inter-layer ping-pong handovers.

Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of a serving cell = configured Inter-layer HO Threshold -

Inter-layer HO Hysteresis

Actual Inter-layer HO Threshold of an adjacent cell = configured Inter-layer HO

None

This parameter is one bit of the 16 bits that are used by the BSC to sort the candidate

cells for handovers.


Note that in hierarchical handover and load handover, the

priority of the target cell must be higher than the Inter-layer

HO Threshold.

If the DL receive level of a cell is lower than the Inter-layer

HO Threshold, the cell is listed in the candidate cells based

This parameter specifies whether the inter-system handover and cell reselection are

allowed The inter-system handover includes the handover from a 2G cell to the adjacent

3G cell and from a 3G cell to the adjacent 2G cell.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the ECSC parameter should also be set to Yes.

None

According to the P/N criterion, if the adjacent cell keeps meeting the triggering

conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT

handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.



difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.


conditions of PBGT handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a PBGT

handover is triggered and the MS is handed over to the adjacent cell.



difficult the PBGT handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in

the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical




difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.

According to the P/N criterion, if the signals in the candidate cell are better than those in

the serving cell for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, a layered hierarchical




difficult the layered hierarchical handover can be triggered.


conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge

handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.



difficult the edge handover can be triggered.


conditions of edge handover for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an edge

handover to the adjacent cell is triggered.




According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its

corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an

edge handover is triggered.




According to the P/N criterion, if the UL or DL receive level is lower than its

corresponding edge handover threshold for N consecutive seconds within P seconds, an

edge handover is triggered.




If the DL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold for a

period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant

edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the

edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference,

and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge

HO DL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call

drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the

relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.

If the UL receive level remains lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold for a

period, the edge handover is triggered. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the relevant

edge handover threshold can be decreased. If the PBGT handover is not enabled and the

edge handover threshold is not properly set, cross coverage, co-channel interference,

and adjacent channel interference are likely to occur. The Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold

This parameter should be adjusted as required. If the Edge

HO UL RX_LEV Threshold is set to a too small value, call

drop may easily occur. If the PBGT handover is enabled, the

relevant edge handover threshold can be decreased.

This parameter specifies whether the interference handover is enabled.

When the receive level is higher the receive level threshold but the transmission quality

is lower than the interference handover quality threshold, the interference handover is

triggered. In other words, the MS is interfered and needs to be handed over.

None

This parameter specifies whether the concentric cell handover is enabled. The

concentric cell is used to achieve the wide coverage of the UL subcell and the aggressive

frequency reuse of the OL subcell. The concentric cell handover can improve system

capacity and conversation quality. The concentric cell handover can be classified into the

UL subcell to OL subcell handover and the OL subcell to UL subcell handover.

None

This parameter specifies whether the time advance (TA) handover is enabled. The TA

handover determines whether the timing advance (TA) is higher than the predefined TA

threshold. When the TA is higher than the predefined TA threshold, a TA handover is

triggered. The TA is calculated based on the distance between the MS and the BTS. The

longer the distance is, the greater the TA value is.

None

This parameter specifies whether the bad quality (BQ) handover is enabled. Whether a

BQ handover should be enabled depends on the UL and DL transmission quality (BER).

When the UL signal quality or the DL signal quality exceeds the BQ handover threshold.

a BQ emergency handover is performed. A rise in BER may result from too low a signal

level or channel interference.

None

This parameter specifies whether to enable the edge handover algorithm. When an MS

makes a call at the edge of a cell, the call may drop if the receive level is too low. To

avoid such a call drop, an edge handover can be performed. When the UL receive level

of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO UL RX_LEV Threshold or the DL receive

level of the serving cell is lower than the Edge HO DL RX_LEV Threshold, the MS is

Huawei recommends that this parameter be set to Yes. In

other words, the edge handover algorithm is enabled.

This parameter specifies whether the layered hierarchical handover is enabled. Cells are

set to different layers and different priorities to implement the layered hierarchical

handover. Then, based on the layers and priorities, calls are handed over to the cells

with high priority (priority is related to Layer of the Cell and Cell Priority).

The lower the layer is, the higher the priority is. The lower

the hierarchy is, the higher the priority is. The layered

hierarchical handover cannot be triggered if the serving cell

has the highest priority in the queue or if the level of the

target cell is lower than the Inter-layer HO Threshold.This parameter specifies whether to enable the PBGT (POWER BUDGET) handover

algorithm. Based on the path loss, the BSC uses the PBGT handover algorithm to search

for a desired cell in real time and decides whether a handover should be performed. The

cell must have less path loss and meet specific requirements. To avoid ping-pong

handovers, the PBGT handover can be performed only on TCHs between the cells of the

Huawei recommends that the PBGT handover algorithm be

enabled. Proper use of PBGT handovers helps to reduce

cross coverage and to avoid co-channel interference and

adjacent channel interference.

This parameter specifies whether to enable the rapid level drop handover. When this

function is enabled, an MS can be handed over to a new cell before the occurrence call

drop caused by the rapid drop of the receive level of the MS.

In dual-band networking mode for densely populated urban

areas, the level drops rapidly due to multiple barriers. The

propagation loss of the 1800 MHz frequency band is greater

than the propagation loss of the 900 MHz frequency band.

Considering the preceding factors, you can enable the

This parameter specifies whether an MS that moves fast in a micro cell can be handed

over to a macro cell. If this parameter is set to Yes, the MS that moves fast in a micro

cell can be handed over to a macro cell, thus reducing the number of handovers. It is

recommended that this handover be applied only in special areas such as highways to

reduce the CPU load. The fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used

It is recommended that this handover be applied only in

special areas such as highways to reduce the CPU load. The

fast-moving micro-to-macro cell handover algorithm is used

only in special conditions.

This parameter specifies whether a traffic load-sharing handover is enabled.

The load handover helps to reduce cell congestion, improve success rate of channel

assignment, and balance the traffic load among cells, thus improving the network

performance. The load handover functions between the TCHs within one BSC or the

TCHs in the cells of the same layer.

If this parameter is set to YES, extra interference may be

introduced when aggressive frequency reuse pattern is

used.

This parameter specifies whether the intra-cell handover is enabled. Note: A forced intra-

cell handover is not subject to this parameter.

Yes for hot-spot areas; densely populated urban areas,

common urban areas, suburbs, and rural areas; No for high-

speed circumstances

This parameter specifies whether a handover between signaling channels is enabled.

When the authentication and ciphering procedures are

enabled on the existing network, this parameter can be set

to Yes.

This parameter specifies whether to adjust the sequence of candidate cells. After the

sequence is adjusted, the handover within the same BSC/MSC takes priority.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the target cell to which the

MS is handed over may not be the cell with the best signal

quality.

The Cell Reselect Penalty Time (PT for short) is used to ensure the safety and validity of

cell reselection because it helps to avoid frequent cell reselection. For details, see GSM

Rec. 05.08 and 04.08.

This parameter applies to only GSM Phase II MSs.

None

This parameter specifies the temporary correction of C2. This parameter is valid only

before the penalty time of cell reselection expires. For details, see GSM Rec. 0508 and

0408.

This parameter applies only to GSM Phase II MSs.

None

This parameter Additional Reselect Param Indication (ACS) is used to inform an MS

where cell reselection parameters can be obtained.

If this parameter is set to 0, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for

calculating C2 from other bytes of the system information type 4 message. If this

parameter is set to 1, the MS should obtain PI and other parameters for calculating C2

None

This parameter specifies the manual correction of C2.

If this parameter is properly configured, the number of handovers can be reduced and a

better cell can be assigned to the MS. When PT is set to 31, it becomes more difficult for

an MS to access the cell when CRO increases.

Generally, the CRO should be less than 25 dB because excessively large CRO may bring

The settings of RXLEV-ACCESS-MIN and CRO should

guarantee that cells with same priority have the same cell

reselect offset.

This parameter Cell Bar Qualify (CBQ) is valid only for cell selection. It is invalid for cell

reselection.

1: barred

0: allowed

Together with CBA, this parameter determines the priority of cells. For details, see GSM

The value of CBQ affects the access of the MS to the

system.

Cell Reselect Parameters Indication (PI for short), sent on the broadcast channel,

indicates whether CRO, TO, and PT are used.

Actually, the MS is informed whether C2-based cell reselection is performed. For details,

see GSM Rec. 0408 and 0508.In addition, a least interval of 5s is required for C2-based

cell reselection to avoid frequent cell reselection.

The MS obtains C1 and C2 of the serving cell at a minimum

interval of 5s. When necessary, the MS re-calculates C1 and

C2 value of all non-serving cells (adjacent cells). The MS

constantly checks whether a cell reselection is required by

referring to following conditions:

This parameter is used to determine whether cell reselection is performed between

different LACs. This parameter can prevent frequent location update, thus lowering the

possibility of losing paging messages. For details, see the description of the cell

reselection hysteresis.

An MS does not respond to pagings during location update.

Thus, the connection rate drops if cell reselection is

performed.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, ping-pong

location updates occur and the signaling load on the SDCCH This parameter specifies the length of the timer for periodic location update.

In the VLR, a regular location update timer is defined. When the location update period

decreases, the service performance is improved. When the signaling traffic of the

network increases, the usage of radio resources drops.In addition, when the location

update period decreases, the MS power consumption increases, and the average

It is recommended that you select a greater value, such as

16, 20, or 25, in the area with heavy traffic, but a smaller

value, such as 2 or 3, in the area with light traffic.

To properly specify the value of this parameter, it is This parameter specifies the number of multi-frames in a cycle on the paging channel,

that is, the number of paging sub-channels on a specific paging channel.

In actual situation, an MS monitors only the associated paging sub-channel. For details,

see GSM Rec. 05.02 and 05.08.

If the value of this parameter increases, the number of paging sub-channels in a cell

The larger this parameter is set, the larger the number of

paging sub-channels in a cell and the smaller the number of

MSs on each paging sub-channel. Setting this parameter

larger can prolong the average service life of MS batteries

but increase the delay of paging messages and reduce the

This parameter specifies the number of CCCH blocks reserved for the AGCH. After the

CCCH is configured, this parameter actually indicates the CCCH usage for AGCH and

PCH.

This parameter affects the paging response time of an MS and the system performance.

None

This parameter specifies the NCCs to be reported by the MSs in a cell. This parameter is

an information element (IE) in the system information type 2 and 6 messages.

If a bit in the value of this parameter is set to 1, the MS reports the corresponding

measurement report to the BTS. The value of this parameter has a byte (eight bits). Each

bit maps with an NCC (0-7) and the most significant bit corresponds to NCC 7. If bit N is

The most significant three bits of BSIC for all cells map with

the NCC. NCC Permitted should be set properly to avoid too

many call drops.

This parameter specifies the cell bar access (CBA).

Value 0 indicates that cell access is allowed.

Value 1 indicates that cell access is not allowed.

Together with CBQ, this parameter can be used to determine the priority of cells. For


The CBA function applies to special conditions. If this

parameter is set to 1 and Cell Bar Quality (CBQ) is set to 0,

only handovers are allowed in a cell, and direct access of an

MS is not allowed. This condition applies to a dual-network

coverage cell. For a common cell, this parameter should be This parameter specifies the number of timeslots between the consecutive

transmissions of channel request messages by an MS.

To reduce the collisions on the RACH and to improve the efficiency of the RACH, an

access algorithm is defined in GSM Rec. 04.08. The algorithm specifies three

parameters: Tx-integer (T for short), maximum number of retransmissions (RET), and S

If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell is small, T should be

set to a great value. If the number of RACH conflicts in a cell

is large, T should be set to a small value. The increase in T

and S prolongs the access time of an MS, thus affecting the

access performance of the whole network. Therefore,

This parameter specifies whether to enable the Attach-detach allowed (ATT) function.

For different cells in the same LAC, their ATTs must be the same.

If this parameter is set to Yes, network connection is not provided after the MS is

powered off, thus saving the network processing time and network resources.

None

If the TC resources are changed before and after the handover, this needs to keep the

test duration for continuously transmitting the uplink data of the old channel. If TDM

transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 10 ms; if IP

transmission is used on the Abis interface, this parameter is set to 20 ms.

None

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRHR

encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRHR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the

ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRHR) timer expires, the timer T3109

(AMRHR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRHR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this may waste the

channel resources and cause the congestion.

When the BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and current call adopts the AMRFR

encoding mode, the timer T3109 (AMRFR) is initiated. If the BSC receives the

ReleaseIndication message before the T3109 (AMRFR) timer expires, the timer T3109

(AMRFR) stops; if the timer T3109 (AMRFR) expires, the BSC deactivates the channel.



In an intra-cell handover, the timer T3103C is initiated after the BSC receives the

HANDOVER COMMAND from target channel. The timer stops after the BSC receives the

HANDOVER COMPLETE message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover

failure message.





This parameter specifies the timer carried by the WaitIndcation information element

when the BSC sends an immediate assignment reject message to an MS.

After the MS receives the immediate assignment reject message, the MS makes another

attempt to access the network after the timer expires.

If this timer is set to a lower value, this may increase the

channel load and influence the access success rate.

For the call on the TCH in stable state, the timer is initiated when the ERROR

INDICATION, CONNECTION FAILURE INDICATION, and RELEASE INDICATION messages

are received, and the call reestablishment allowed is set to Yes for the cell where the call

is. Upon receipt of a CLEAR COMMAND message from the MSC, the timer stops. The

BSC sends a CLEAR REQUEST message after the timer expires.

If this timer is set to a higher value, this seizes the radio

resources too much, and influences the channel resource

utilization.


call reestablishment success rate.This parameter specifies the connection release delay timer that is used to delay the

channel deactivation after the main signaling link is disconnected, and the purpose is to

reserve a period of time for repeated link disconnections.

The timer T311 is initiated when the BSC receives the REL_IND message from the BTS.

the RF CHAN REL message is sent to the BTS after the timer expires.



The BSC sends a ChannelRelease message and enables the timer T3109. If the BSC

receives the ReleaseIndication message before the timer T3109 stops; the BSC

deactivates the channel, if the timer T3109 expires.



This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover success message after a

handover command is sent in an outgoing BSC handover. If the timer expires, the

outgoing BSC handover fails.





This timer is used to set the time of waiting a handover complete message after a

handover request acknowledgment message is sent by the BSC in 2G/3G handover or

inter-BSC handover. If the timer expires, The MS reports a Clear REQ message.





After the BSC sends a handover command, the timer T3107 is initiated. Before the timer

T3107 expires, the timer T3107 stops if the BSC receives a handover complete message.

After the timer T3107 expires, the BSC sends a handover failure message.




assignment success rate.

In an outgoing BSC handover, after the BSC sends a handover request message, the

timer T7 is initiated. Before the timer T7 expires, the timer T7 stops if the BSC receives a

handover acknowledgment message. After the timer T7 expires, the BSC sends an

outgoing BSC handover failure message.





In an intra-BSC handover, the timer T3103 is initiated after the BSC sends a handover

command. Before the timer T3103 expires, the timer stops if the BSC receives a

Handover Complete message. After the timer expires, the BSC sends a handover failure

message.





The timer is initiated after the BSC sends the CR message; if the BSC receives the CC

message before the timer expires, the timer stops; if the timer expires, the BSS releases

the seized SDCCH channel.



This parameter specifies the timer used in the immediate assignment procedure.

The T3101 is started when the BSC sends an IMM ASS message to the BTS. If the BSC

receives an EST IND message before T3101 expires, T3101 is stopped; if T3101 expires

before the BSC receives an EST IND message, the BSS releases the seized SDCCH.




immediate assignment success rate.

Send Classmark Enquiring Result To MSC Enable. None

Enquire Classmark After In-BSC Handover Enable. None

This parameter specifies whether a cell configured with baseband frequency hopping

supports the intelligent power consumption decrease.None

Qtru Signal Merge Switch

The QTRU signal merge algorithm is to prevent the calls with great difference between

uplink signal strengths from assigning in the same timeslot.

The BSC monitors the high-level signal and overwhelms the low-level signal per 0.5

second. If the highest uplink signal strength of a timeslot －the lowest uplink signal

None

This parameter specifies the maximum number of paging messages that a cell is allowed

to send within a statistical period.None

This parameter specifies the average number of paging messages that a cell is allowed

to send within a statistical period.None

This parameter specifies the maximum number of messages in the buffer of the cell

paging group packet when the Paging Messages Optimize at Abis Interface is turned on.None

This parameter specifies the interval between two cell paging group packets, which is an

integral multiple of 50 ms.None

The cell paging message packaging is determined by the system load. If the paging

message packaging timer is enabled, the paging messages are packaged according to

cells; otherwise, the paging messages are packaged according to the CPU.

None

This parameter specifies which type of interference band statistics algorithm to use, that

is, whether interference band statistics algorithm I or interference band statistics

algorithm II, when the frequency scanning function is enabled.

None

This parameter specifies whether the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm after the

cell is out of service.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC reports a cell out-of-service alarm if the cell

is out of service.

When this parameter is set to No, the BSC does not report a cell out-of-service alarm if

None


services of low-level BTS for cascaded BTSs if the current-level sublink cannot be

preempted.

None


services.None

This parameter specifies whether the MS is forced to send a handover access message. None

This parameter specifies whether the MS can be handed over to another channel

through assignment procedure in intra-cell handover. If this parameter is set to Yes, the

assignment procedure can be used for all types of intra-cell handovers.

The assignment procedure can reduce the duration of intra-

cell handover.

Frequency scanning refers to the scanning of uplink receive levels of cell frequencies.

The scanning result reflects the strength of frequency signals received by the cell.

This parameter specifies the scanning result type used from the start of a frequency

scanning task to the reporting of a scanning result.

Main/Diversity: current, minimum, maximum, and mean values of the main and

None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-cell handover

timeout are not contained in the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by intra-BSC out-cell



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by outgoing-BSC



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by incoming-BSC



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by resource check are

not contained in the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by no MRs for a long

time for the MS are not contained in the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by forced handover

failure are not contained in the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by equipment fault



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by Abis territorial link

fault are not contained in the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the connection failure message is sent by

the BTS because the release indication message is sent or the waiting period of call

reestablishment times out, the call drops caused by this reason are not contained in the

None



When the call drop counters are optimized,the call drops caused by the reasons except

for the radio link failure, handover access failure, OM intervention, and radio resource


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio resource



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by OM intervention



None



In optimization, the call drops caused by handover access failure are not contained in

the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by radio link failure



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by sequence error are



None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by unsolicited DM

response are not contained in the statistics of call drops.


None



When the call drop counters are optimized, the call drops caused by T200 timeout are



None

This parameter specifies whether the repeater is configured in a cell. The function of

repeater is simpler than that of BTS, and the repeater is an extended equipment that is

used for the wide area or indoor application solving the problem of blind area. Not only

the repeater can improve the base station coverage, but also increase the total traffic

volume of network.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the asynchronous handover is

performed in intra-BSC handover; otherwise, the

synchronous handover is performed.

This parameter specifies the delay of TRX aiding detection performed after the cell is

initialized.

The cell is unstable after initialization; therefore, if the TRX aiding detection starts

immediately after cell initialization, a wrong decision might be made. In such a case, this

parameter is used to specify a delay.

If the parameter is set too small, a wrong decision might be

made in TRX aiding detection; if the parameter is set too

large, a faulty main-BCCH might lead to delayed triggering

of TRX aiding function after cell initialization.

This parameter specifies whether to allow flow control on the Abis interface.

The flow control function applies to the call management. When the BSS is congested,

some service requests are rejected or delayed so that the system load decreases. The

flow control on the Abis interface is mainly used to balance the system load caused by

Abis flow.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the BSC initiates

cell flow control when receiving the RACH overload

message from the BTS. That is, the minimum receive level

of MSs is increased to reduce RACH access requests.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the BTS sends

This parameter specifies whether to support the half-rate service in this cell. It is one of

the cell reselection parameters in the system information type 3 message. None

This parameter specifies the maximum transmit power level of MSs. It is one of the cell

re-selection parameters in the system information type 3 message.

This parameter is used to control the transmit power of MSs. For details, see GSM Rec.

05.05.

In a GSM900 cell, the maximum power control level of the MS ranges from 0 to 19,

None

This parameter is contained in the Cell Options IE of the system information type 3 and

6 messages.

If this parameter is set to Yes, the receive level of the MS equals the measured receive

level in FH minus the receive level obtained from the timeslots on the BCCH TRX.

None

This parameter is imported with the requested bandwidth when the assignment request

is sent. The actual bandwidth assigned to a user is the value of multiplying the

requested bandwidth by the ActGene.

The parameter here is the value of the actual ActGene multiplied by 10 in fact. When

the resources are allocated in practice, the total bandwidth is expanded by ten times.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, a wider bandwidth

is occupied by services.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS low priority service.


proportion of discarded packets is. Thus, the priority value

of the major service should be smaller than that of the

minor service. It is recommended that the default value be

used.

This parameter specifies the priority of the PS high priority service.





used.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS data service.





used.

This parameter specifies the priority of the CS voice service.





used.

This parameter specifies the included angle formed by the major lobe azimuth of the

antennas in two cells under one BTS. The major lobe azimuth is measured from the

north to the direction of the cell antenna in a clockwise direction.

None

This parameter is calculated according to the Included Angle and the actual Antenna

Azimuth Angle. The Included Angle refers to the coverage area of the cell.

Antenna Azimuth Angle = actual Antenna Azimuth Angle - Included Angle/2

None

This parameter specifies the number of RACH burst timeslots in a RACH load

measurement.

The value of this parameter indicates the interval during which the BSC determines

whether an RACH timeslot is busy. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS

frequently sends the overload messages to the BSC. Thus,

the system resource utilization decreases and MSs cannot

access the network.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS sends an

This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send the overload indication

message to the BSC.

The overload causes include TRX processor overload, downlink CCCH overload, and

AGCH overload. For details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.

If the value of this parameter is too small, the BTS

frequently reports overload indication messages to the BSC.

As a result, the BSC frequently reports overload indication

messages to the MSC and thus the MSC may initiate flow

control. If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS This parameter is used by the BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot,

that is, the load of the access requests on the RACH and the load of all the messages

(such as paging messages and packet immediate assignment messages) on the PCH. For


If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the value of this parameter, the BTS periodically

If the value of this parameter is too small, the signaling

traffic on the Abis interface increases and thus the load of

the BSC increases. If the value of this parameter is too

great, the BSC cannot process the exceptions in the BTS in

time.

This parameter specifies the interval for sending the overload messages.

This parameter is used by a BTS to inform the BSC of the load on a CCCH timeslot.For

details, see GSM Rec. 08.58.If the load on a CCCH timeslot exceeds the CCCH Load

Threshold, the BTS periodically sends the CCCH overload message to the BSC. The CCCH

overload messages include the uplink RACH overload messages and the downlink PCH

If this parameter is set to a too small value, RF resource

status is reported frequently and thus the load of the BSC is

increased. If this parameter is set to a too great value, RF

resource status is not updated in time. Therefore, the BSC

cannot handle the interference in the BTS in time. This parameter specifies the interval for the BTS to send radio resource indication

messages, informing the BSC of the interference levels on idle channels of a TRX. In the

radio resource indication message, the TRX reports the interference level of each idle

channel in the measurement period.


If this parameter is set to a too small value, radio resource

indication messages are reported frequently and thus the

load of the BSC is increased.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, radio resource

status is not immediately reported and thus the BSC cannot

The value of this parameter has 16 bits. The most significant bit indicates whether the

parameter is valid. Bits 14-8 indicate the level threshold. Bits 7-0 indicate the BER

threshold.

The BTS adjusts the MS frequency according to the value of this parameter.

None

This parameter is used for the fast-moving handover decision. If this parameter is set to

Yes, the BTS calculates the speed at which the MS moves towards or away from the BTS,

and reports the speed to the BSC through the uplink MR.

None



antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty. If this parameter is set to a small value,

the error is small.

None



antenna system connected to the TRX is faulty.

If this parameter is set to a small value, the error is small.

This parameter specifies a condition for generating a BTS alarm. When the output

power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is generated.The

Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold indicate the two

thresholds of the error.If the value of this parameter is greater, the error is smaller.

None


When the output power of a TRX of a transmitter is lower than a fixed level, an error is

generated.The Power output error threshold and Power output reduction threshold

indicate the two thresholds of the error.

If this parameter is set to a great value, the error is small.

For the BTS2X, this parameter is used to compensate the difference of RSSI between the

time the tower-mounted amplifier (TMA) is installed and the time the TMA is not

installed.

The value of this parameter when the tower-mounted amplifier is not installed is 3

greater than that when the tower-mounted amplifier is installed.

None

This parameter specifies the start frame number of the BTS. It is used to synchronize the

MS and the BTS after the BTS is re-initialized.

The frame offset technology arranges the frame numbers of different cells under the

same BTS to be different from one another by one frame offset. Thus, the FCH and SCH

signals of adjacent cells do not appear in the same frame to facilitate the MS decoding.

For the BTS2X, BTS3001C, BTS3001C+, and BTS3002C, this

parameter is invalid. For other BTSs, this parameter is valid.

This parameter specifies the maximum number of levels by which the BTS RF power

decreases. The decrease in the BTS RF power is implemented through dynamic power

control and static power control.

For the BTS2X, this parameter is shielded. For the BTS3X and double-transceiver BTS,

this parameter is invalid.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the BTS power

reduces too much. If the value of this parameter is too

small, the BTS power reduces less and the power reduction

effect is not good.

This parameter specifies the period during which interference levels are averaged.

Before the BTS sends the radio resource indication message to the BSC, the interference

levels on the idle channels in the period specified by this parameter are averaged. The

result is used to classify the interference levels on the idle channels into five interference

bands.

If the value of this parameter is too great, the average result

cannot reflect the change correctly. If the value of this

parameter is too small, the averaging is performed too

frequently and resources are wasted.


The BSS measures the uplink quality of the radio channels occupied by MSs, calculates

and reports the interference level on each of the idle channels. This helps the BSC to

assign channels.

According to the strength of interference signals, the interference signals are classified

None




assign channels.


None




assign channels.


None




assign channels.


None




assign channels.


None




assign channels.


None

If Assignment Cell Load Judge Enable is set to Yes, the directed try procedure is started if

the following two conditions are met: The cell supports the directed try procedure. The

load of the cell is greater than or equal to the Cell Direct Try Forbidden Threshold.

None

This parameter specifies whether to support DRX. To reduce the power consumption,

the discontinuous reception mechanism (DRX) is introduced to the GSM. The MS that

supports the DRX consumes less power to receive broadcast messages that the MSs are

interested in. This prolongs the service time of the MS battery.

The BSC that supports the DRX should send the dispatching message to MSs so that the

None

This parameter specifies the data service supported.

This value of the parameter can be set as required.

0000000001: indicates that only the NT14.5K data service is supported.



None

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the BTS transmit power is adjusted to the maximum

before the BSC sends a handover command to the MS. In addition, the BTS transmit

power is not adjusted during the handover to ensure the success of the handover.

When the receive level of an MS drops rapidly, a handover occurs. In this case, the BSC

cannot adjust the transmit power of the MS and BTS in time. The MS may fail to receive

If this parameter is set to StartUp, the probability that the

BTS transmits at full power increases. The interference

increases. The handover success rate, however, is increased

to some extent.

This parameter specifies whether the BTS reports the voice quality index (VQI). If this

parameter is set to Report, the BTS reports the VQI. The BSC measures the traffic on a

per VQI basis. There are 11 levels of speech quality. If the level is low, the speech quality

is good. The traffic related to AMR and non-AMR is measured separately, and thus the

speech quality is monitored.

For V9R3 and later, the VQI can be measured and reported.

This parameter specifies whether to permit the low noise amplifier (LNA) bypass.

For the BTS3002C, if each cell is configured with two TRXs

(O2 or S2), Diversity LNA Bypass Permitted is set to Yes. The

RF connection supports the configuration of the main and

diversity antennas. This parameter is configured for only the

BTS3002C.

This parameter specifies the receive quality gain when the number of frequencies

participate in FH is 8. When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,

the receive quality gain will be obtained. Before performing power control, the BSC

needs to consider this gain.

None





None





None





None





None





None





None


participate in FH is 1.When frequencies are configured for frequency hopping in a cell,



None

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC

increases the uplink transmit power.None

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible adjustment step when the BSC

decreases the uplink transmit power.None

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink

receive quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.None

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the uplink

receive quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.None

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the uplink receive

quality is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.None

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR full-rate call, and when the downlink


This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive


This parameter specifies current call is a half-rate call, and when the uplink receive

quality is greater than the threshold, Huawei III power control is performed.None

This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the uplink receive


This parameter specifies current call is a full-rate call, and when the downlink receive


When the receive level is lower than the threshold, Huawei III power control is

performed.The value of this parameter ranges from 0 to 63 (corresponding to -110 dBm

to -47 dBm).

None

When the receive level is higher than the threshold, Huawei III power control is


to -47 dBm).

None

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the uplink

power control.None

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the uplink

power control.None

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of

downlink receive quality.None

This parameter specifies the number of MRs used in the slide-window filtering of uplink

receive level.None

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive quality exponential

filtering formula.None

This parameter specifies a constant value in the uplink receive level exponential filtering

formula.None

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step when the BSC

increases the downlink power.None

This parameter specifies the maximum allowed adjustment step when the BSC

decreases the downlink transmit power.None

This parameter specifies current call is an AMR half-rate call, and when the downlink


















to -47 dBm).

None



to -47 dBm).

None

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive quality in the downlink

power control.None

This parameter specifies the step adjustment ratio of the receive level in the downlink

power control.None


downlink receive quality.None


downlink receive level.None

This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive quality exponential


This parameter specifies a constant value in the downlink receive level exponential


This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the TCH in

a power control period.None

This parameter specifies the maximum number of discarded MRs allowed on the SDCCH

in a power control period.None

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power

control commands.None

This parameter specifies the minimum interval between two consecutive uplink power

control commands. None

When the number of missing MRs in a power control period exceeds the value of this

parameter, the power control stops.None

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the BTS.

0-16 (0 dB to 30 dB in steps of 2 dB)

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the dynamic power


In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to DL

Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value of

DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.

None

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to this

threshold, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL Qual. Bad


control.


None

In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to UL Qual.

Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual.

Bad UpLEVDiff.

None

In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to this

threshold, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.

This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power control.



None


receive quality.None

This parameter specifies the maximum permissible up adjustment step based on the

receive level.None


receive quality.None

This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the

quality zone 2 (the RQ value is greater than or equal to 3) based on the signal level.

In the Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades

(0, 1-2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). Every quality zone has different maximum

permissible down adjustment step.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the algorithm

cannot realize fast power control. If this parameter is set to

a higher value, the effectiveness of power control cannot be

guaranteed.

This parameter specifies the AMR maximum down adjustment step permitted by the

quality zone 1 (the RQ value is greater than 0 and less than 3) based on the signal level.







guaranteed.

This parameter specifies the maximum step length in decreasing the signal level in

power control when the RQ is 0.







guaranteed.

When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper

threshold and the lower threshold of the stable state quality zone are set. When the

signal quality exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power

control is performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink

quality for power control.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the quality is poor


degraded; conversely, the quality is good without power

control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.


threshold and the lower threshold of the quality zone are set. When the signal quality

exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold, power control is

performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for

power control.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the quality is

good without power control. Thus, the battery life is


parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is poor

without power control, thus the conversation quality is The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an

upper threshold and a lower threshold. Power control is not performed if the signal level

is between the upper threshold and the lower threshold. Power control is performed

only when the signal level exceeds the upper threshold or is below the lower threshold.



becomes high without power control. Thus, the battery life

is reduced and the network interference is increased. If this

parameter is set to a too small value, the downlink level

becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an









becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper



performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power

control.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the quality is

poor without power control. Thus, the conversation quality

is degraded. If this parameter is set to a too small value, the

quality is good without power control. Thus, the battery life

is reduced. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper



performed.

This parameter determines the uplink quality upper threshold of the quality zone.













parameter is set to a too small value, the uplink level










becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. This parameter specifies the number of downlink measurement reports used for

predicting the level in power control.

In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history

measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction

function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

None

This parameter specifies the number of uplink measurement reports used for predicting

the level in power control.

In Huawei II power control algorithm, the average filter value in the history

measurement report is not used for power control decision. Instead, the prediction

function is applied in the filter to compensate the delay of power adjustment.

None

This parameter specifies whether the compensation of AMR measurement reports is

allowed by Huawei II power control algorithm.

When this parameter is set to Yes, the Huawei II power control algorithm puts the

currently received measurement reports in the measurement report compensation

queue and then records the change of the transmit power based on the MS power and

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the

currently received measurement reports in the

measurement report compensation queue and then records

the change of the transmit power based on the MS power

and the BTS power in the measurement report.

This parameter specifies the number of measurement reports sampled for calculating

the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.



quality. This average value indicates the radio environment

of the BTS. When you configure this parameter, you must

consider the delay and accuracy of the average value


the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.


network calculates the average value of the uplink signal


of the MS. When you configure this parameter, you must



the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.



levels. This average value indicates the radio environment




the average value of the uplink signal strength before the AMR MS power adjustment.






This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous AMR

power control commands.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power

control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too

small value, the power control may be performed

frequently, thus wasting the resources.

This parameter specifies the maximum range of dynamic power adjustment for the

BTS.Class 0 to class 15 corresponds to 0 dB to 30 dB, with a step of 2 dB. If this

parameter is set 5, the power ranges from class 0 to class 4.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the dynamic

power adjustment capability of the BTS is lowered.

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is higher than or equal to the

DL Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, the value of DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold contains the value

of the DL Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.

None

In downlink power control, if the downlink receive quality is greater than or equal to the

value of this parameter, then the actual DL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain DL

Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the

downlink power control.


None

In uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is higher than or equal to the UL

Qual. Bad Trig Threshold, then the actual UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL

Qual. Bad UpLEVDiff.

None

In the uplink power control, if the uplink receive quality is greater than or equal to the

value of this parameter, then UL RX_LEV Upper Threshold should contain UL Qual Bad

UpLEVDiff. This parameter further improves the expected level of the uplink power

control.


None


signal quality.

If this parameter is set to a too small value, the algorithm


a too great value, the effectiveness of power control cannot

be guaranteed.


receive level.




be guaranteed.

This parameter determines the maximum permissible down adjustment step based on

the receive quality.




be guaranteed.

In Huawei II power control algorithm, the quality zone is divided into three grades (0, 1-

2, ≥ 3) based on the receive quality (RQ). A maximum step length of power control is set

for each quality zone.






be guaranteed.









be guaranteed.









be guaranteed.

After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period

before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control

decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during

the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive

quality of the BTS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.

None

After the BSC delivers the power control command, it should wait for a certain period

before receiving an acknowledgement message. Therefore, the MR that power control

decision is based on cannot accurately reflect the radio environment of the BTS during

the power adjustment, but misses the latest changes of the receive level and receive

quality of the MS. Thus, the power adjustment is delayed.

None

This parameter specifies whether the compensation of measurement reports is allowed

by Huawei II power control algorithm.

When determining whether to perform power control, the BSC performs weighted

filtering on the values of the receive level and of the receive quality in several history

measurement reports. The measurement reports may be obtained by the BTS/MS at

If this parameter is set to Yes, the BSC or BTS puts the

currently received measurement reports in the

measurement report compensation queue and then records

the change of the transmit power based on the MS power

and the BTS power in the measurement report.


the average value of the downlink signal quality before the BTS power adjustment.







the average value of the uplink signal quality before the MS power adjustment.







the average value of the downlink signal strength before the BTS power adjustment.







the average value of the uplink signal strength before the MS power adjustment.






This parameter specifies whether enable Huawei II power control algorithm or Huawei

III power control algorithm.None




performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the downlink quality for

power control.





is reduced. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper



performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the downlink quality for

power control.





is reduced. The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an


















becomes low, and call drop may easily occur. When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper



performed. This parameter specifies the lower threshold of the uplink quality for power

control.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the signal

quality of the MS is poor without power control. Thus, the

conversation quality is degraded. If this parameter is set to

a too small value, the signal quality is good without power

control. Thus, the battery life is reduced.When the power control step is calculated based on the signal quality, the upper



performed. This parameter specifies the upper threshold of the uplink quality for power

control.














becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.

The power control step is calculated based on the signal level. The signal level has an









becomes low, and call drop may easily occur.

This parameter specifies the minimum time interval between two continuous power

control commands.

If this parameter is set to a too great value, the power

control may be delayed. If this parameter is set to a too

small value, the power control may be performed

frequently, thus wasting the resources.

This parameter specifies the constant of filtering the collision signal strength for power

control. The MS obtains valid measurement signals by sampling for NAVGI times.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the proportion of

the history value in the interference measurement results

decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower value, the

proportion of the history value in the interference

measurement results increases.

This parameter specifies the channel where the receive power level of the MS is

measured for the uplink power control.None

This parameter specifies the reduced power of the BTS on the PBCCH. None

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the transfer mode, which is

used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet transfer mode.

This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter

the signal level in the packet transfer mode. This parameter is used when the MS

measures the downlink signal strength in the packet transfer mode and calculates Cn of

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-

1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value,

the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

This parameter specifies the signal strength filter period in the packet idle mode, which

is used to set the signal strength filter period of the MS in the packet idle mode.

This parameter is used by the signal strength filter for power control to periodically filter

the signal level in the idle mode. This parameter is used when the MS measures the

downlink signal strength in the packet idle mode and calculates Cn of the MS output

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the influence of Cn-

1 on Cn increases; if this parameter is set to a lower value,

the influence of Cn-1 on Cn decreases.

This parameter specifies the initial power level.

This parameter determines the expected receive signal strength on the BTS when the

MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the output power

of the MS decreases; if this parameter is set to a lower

value, the output power of the MS increases.

This parameter is used for the open-loop power control.

The MS uses the Alpha parameter to calculate the output power of the uplink PDCH,

namely, PCH.

When the MS uses the GPRS dynamic power control, this parameter determines the

reduced level of the MS transmit power mapping to the path loss.

None


After a downlink TBF is established, the network initiates the N3105.

Upon setting the RRBP field in the downlink RLC data block, the network resets the

N3105 when it receives the packet acknowledgment message from the MS on the uplink

RLC data block corresponding to the RRBP field; otherwise, the network increases N3105


network to downlink errors decreases and the probability of

the frequent TBF release increases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF

may occur (such as the MS does not receive the message of This parameter specifies the maximum value of the N3103.

Upon receiving the last RLC data block when the uplink transmission is complete, the

network sends the MS a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 and initiates the

N3103.

If the network does not receive a packet control acknowledgment message within

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the abnormal

uplink TBF release increases caused by the overflow of the

N3103.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release time of

the uplink TBF delays due to no response of the MS caused This parameter specifies the maximum value of N3101.

In uplink dynamic assignment mode, the multiple MSs can share one uplink channel if

the downlink data blocks carry the USF value.

After the network starts to assign a USF value to the uplink TBF (uplink TBF is

established), the N3101 is initiated. The network reserves the RLC uplink blocks mapping


network to uplink errors decreases and the probability of

the frequent TBF release increases.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the abnormal TBF

may occur (such as the MS has not received the message of This parameter specifies the release delay of the downlink TBF.

After sending the last downlink RLC data block and confirming that all downlink data

blocks are received, the network does not immediately notify the MS of releasing this

TBF but forcedly set the last data block not received. Therefore, keep this TBF

unreleased by continuously resending the last downlink data block with the Relative

If this parameter is set to a higher value, this wastes the

wireless resources and influences the the access

performance of other MSs in the network, thus causing the

useless signaling seizing the channel bandwidth and wasting

the downlink resources. This parameter specifies the inactive period of the extended uplink TBF.

Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data blocks (CountValue=0) from the MS that

supports the extended uplink TBF function, the network does not release this uplink TBF

immediately but set it to the inactive mode. To transmit the uplink RLC data blocks

during inactive period, the MS can use this TBF that automatically becomes active

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the release delay

of the uplink TBF increases, thus wasting the uplink

resources.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the uplink TBF

frequently releases and establishes, thus increasing the

This parameter specifies the release delay of the non-extended uplink TBF.

Upon receiving the last uplink RLC data block (CountValue=0), the network sends the MS

a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack message with FAI=1 to notify the MS of releasing this uplink

TBF. To establish the downlink TBF on the unreleased uplink TBF, the network will notify

the MS of releasing this uplink TBF for a period of delay after this parameter is set. After

If this parameter is set to a higher value, this can increase

the probability of establishing the downlink TBF on the

PACCH, thus greatly reducing the downlink TBF

establishment time; however, if the MS needs to send new

uplink data, because the BSC6000 does not support the

This parameter specifies that the MS performs the load-based cell reselection can be

controlled. The load-based cell reselection is available to the MSs that the receive level

is lower than this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the load-based

reselection is triggered difficultly; if this parameter is set to

a lower value, the load-based reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of GPRS transmission quality. If the

receive quality is equal to or greater than this threshold, you can infer that the

transmission quality is worsened.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of

times that the transmission quality is worsened decreases,

and the critical reselection is triggered difficultly; if this

parameter is set to a lower value, the number of times that

the transmission quality is worsened increases, and the

This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE 8PSK transmission quality. If the

MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission

quality is worsened.






This parameter is used to collect the statistics of EDGE GMSK transmission quality. If the

MEAN_BEP is less than or equal to this threshold, you can infer that the transmission

quality is worsened.






This parameter specifies the interval between two NC2 cell reselections in a cell.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the number of cell

reselections increases; if this parameter is set to a lower

value, the number of cell reselections decreases.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive level of the serving cell is

lower than the level threshold of cell reselection within the Normal Cell Reselection

Watch Period; If the number of times is lower than this parameter, the cell reselection is

allowed.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the probability of

the cell reselection increases; if this parameter is set to a

lower value, the probability of the cell reselection

decreases.

This parameter specifies the number of times that the receive levels of the serving cell

are continuously calculated before the P/N criterion is determined.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the precision of

decision may be reduced; if this parameter is set to a higher

value, the decision may not be performed immediately.

This parameter specifies whether enabling the normal cell reselection algorithm is

allowed.None

This parameter specifies whether enabling the cell load-based reselection algorithm is

allowed.None

This parameter specifies whether enabling the critical cell reselection algorithm is

allowed.None

This parameter specifies whether a 2G cell or 3G cell is selected in the inter-RAT cell

reselection procedure.None


neighbor cells.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the weight of the

previous signal level increases; if this parameter is set to a

lower value, the weight of current signal level increases.

This parameter specifies the allowed number of consecutive MRs that are lost. If the

number of consecutive MRs that are lost exceeds this parameter, the previous MR is

thought to be invalid.

None

This parameter specifies that if the cell load is lower than this threshold, the cell can

receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection. That is, the cell will

receive the MSs from other cells due to the load-based reselection if the TBF

multiplexing rate is lower than corresponding percentage.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is easier for the

MS to reselect this cell; if this parameter is set to a lower

value, it is difficult for the MS to reselect this cell.

The load-based reselection is enabled when the cell load is higher than this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, it is difficult to

trigger the load-based reselection; if this parameter is set to

a lower value, it is easier to trigger the load-based

reselection.

This parameter specifies that the accumulatively calculated number of times that the

downlink transmission quality of MS is lower than the transmission quality threshold of

MS. The critical reselection needs to be performed when the ratio of the accumulatively

calculated number of times and the number of times in the downlink transmission

quality measurement report reaches this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical


a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter specifies that the Cell Urgent Reselection Allowed can be determined

when the transmission quality in the received downlink transmission quality

measurement report is lower than this threshold.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the critical


a lower value, the critical reselection is triggered easily.

This parameter specifies the penalty duration for the cell reselection. The cell penalty

can be performed within the Cell Penalty Last Time only.

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the MS cannot be

handed over to the target cell that the previous reselection

fails or the load-based reselection occurs within the time

longer than this value; conversely, the time greatly reduces.

This parameter specifies the signal level for target cell penalty after the BSC receives the

cell reselection failure message or after the cell initiates the load-based reselection. This

parameter is valid only within the Cell Penalty Last Time.

If the value of this parameter increases, the MS can be

handed over to the target cell only if the target cell has a

higher level; conversely, the MS can be handed over to the

target cell only if the target cell has a lower level.

To avoid ping-pong handovers, when this parameter specifies the cell reselection, the

level of the target cell should higher than the total of the Min Access Level Threshold

and the Cell Reselection Hysterisis.

The setting of this parameter is to avoid the ping-pong

reselection between cells.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level that is required for a cell to serve as

a candidate cell for handover.None

This parameter specifies whether to support the QoS optimization.

The GPRS GSN provides different subscribers with flexible QoS mechanism. The QoS

level is determined in the subscription.

The QoS control parameters include the service priority class, reliability class, delay

class, and throughput class.

None

This parameter specifies the policy of the handover between the underlaid subcell and

the overlaid subcell in a PS domain.

In version V9R8, the BSC supports the PDCH configured in the overlaid subcell or in the

underlaid subcell, and supports the handover between the overlaid subcell and the

underlaid subcell.

This parameter is configured according to the congestion of

the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice services. If the

underlaid voice services are congested, the overlaid-to-

underlaid subcell handover is only allowed; if the overlaid

voice services are congested, the underlaid-to-overlaid This parameter specifies the maximum transmission delay of the POC services.

The POC services have a strict requirement on the transmission delay. The network

should support the detection of the POC service type and take measures to reduce the

transmission delay to meet the requirement of the POC services.

If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the Transfer Delay in the

None

This parameter specifies the upper limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.




If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink

None

This parameter specifies the lower limit of the bandwidth for the POC services.




If the service type carried in the received message is POC, the uplink/downlink

None

This parameter specifies whether to support the packet assignment, that is, the

assignment of the packet channel to the MS through the PACCH, this only involves the

takeover of the uplink immediate assignment. To improve the speed of the MS to access

the network, after the packet assignment is taken over to the BTS, the BSC reserves

uplink resources for the BTS. The BTS obtains the channel request information of the MS

When this parameter is set to Yes, the access delay of the

MS reduces.

This parameter specifies whether to support the takeover of the packet immediate

assignment by the BTS. It is relative to the uplink immediate assignment.

To improve the speed of the MS to access the network, the BSS pre-allocates the uplink

TBF resources and sends these resources to the BTS. When the MS initiates the channel

request, the BTS uses the pre-allocated resources to send the immediate assignment


MS reduces.

When both the MS and the network support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained

from the ABQP in the PFC.

When the MS or the network does not support PFC, the QoS parameters are obtained

from the DL UNITDAT of the SGSN or from the uplink request of the MS.

Gbr:guaranteed bit rate.

None

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set the MCS type for

transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you should dynamically adjust

the MCS types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all

For the cell with the good Um interface quality, set the

parameter to MCS6; for the cell with the poor Um interface

quality, set the parameter to MCS4.

This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled downlink.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the downlink, you should set this parameter to a value

among MCS1-MCS9.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the downlink, you should set this parameter to

UNFIXED.

None

This parameter specifies the default MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, you should set the MCS type for

transmitting the first TBF through this parameter. Then, you dynamically adjust the MCS

types of other TBFs based on the signal transmission quality.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should fixedly use an MCS type for all

None

This parameter specifies the fixed MCS type used on the EDGE-enabled uplink.

To fixedly use an MCS type on the uplink, you should set this parameter to a value

among MCS1-MCS9.

To dynamically adjust the MCS type of the uplink, set this parameter to UNFIXED.

None

This parameter specifies the average period of bit error detected.

This parameter can be used to obtain the forgetting factor, which is used for the MS to

calculate the measurement results.


proportion of the BEP history information sent by the MS is;

otherwise, the smaller the proportion of the BEP history

information sent by the MS is.

This parameter specifies the mode of controlling the quality of links. During the data

transmission process, the modulation scheme and coding scheme can be changed to

dynamically adapt to the radio transmission environment, thus improving the quality of

links.

- Setting and effect

None

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the

downlink TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.

When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is larger than or equals to the value

of this parameter, the CS type of the downlink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is easy to

decrease the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest

value, it is hard to decrease the CS type.

















When the retransmission rate of the downlink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value



increase the CS type. If this parameter is set to a modest

value, it is hard to increase the CS type.















This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the downlink.

To dynamically adjust the CS type on the downlink, set the CS type for transmitting the

first TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically

adjusted based on the signal transmission quality.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, all TBFs use the default CS

None

This parameter specifies the fixed CS type used on the downlink.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the downlink, this parameter can be set to

CS1, CS2, CS3, or CS4.

If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the downlink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

None

This parameter specifies the retransmission rate threshold for the CS type of the uplink

TBF to change from CS4 to CS3.

When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is larger than or equals to the value of

this parameter, the CS type of the uplink TBF changes from CS4 to CS3.




















When the retransmission rate of the uplink TBF is smaller than or equals to the value of



















This parameter specifies the default CS type used on the uplink.

To dynamically adjust the CS type on the uplink, set the CS type for transmitting the first

TBF through this parameter. Then, the CS types of other TBFs are dynamically adjusted

based on the signal transmission quality.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, all TBFs use the default CS types.

None

This parameter specifies the fixed coding scheme (CS) type used on the uplink.

If the CS type is permanently adjusted on the uplink, this parameter can be set to CS1,

CS2, CS3, or CS4.

If the CS type is dynamically adjusted on the uplink, this parameter is set to UNFIXED.

None

This parameter specifies the weight of QoS background services. The background class

service is a kind of traffic class services.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, this kind of

services occupies high bandwidth. If this parameter is set to

a modest value, this kind of services occupies low

bandwidth.





bandwidth.





bandwidth.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Traffic Handle Priority 1 (THP1).




bandwidth.





bandwidth.





bandwidth.

This parameter specifies the priority weight of QoS Allocation/Retention Priority 1

(ARP1).




bandwidth.

This parameter specifies the timer set to release the Abis timeslots.

When a channel is idle, this timer is started.

When the timer expires, the Abis timeslots are released.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the idle Abis

timeslots cannot be fully used.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the Abis timeslots

may be applied frequently.

This parameter specifies the number of channels reserved for the CS services.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PS services

are affected.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the CS services

are affected when there are too many PS services.

This parameter specifies the levels of dynamic channels preempted by CS services and

PS services. Only full-rate TCHs are the dynamic channels that can be preempted.

All dynamic channels can be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all

the dynamic channels.

Control channels cannot be preempted: It indicates that the CS services can preempt all

None

This parameter specifies the timer set to release the idle dynamic channel after all TBFs

on the dynamic channel are released.

If all TBFs on a dynamic channel are released, the dynamic channel is not released

immediately. Instead, a timer is started when the channel is idle.

Before the timer expires, if there are new services, the dynamic channel continues to be

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the dynamic

channel resources may be wasted when there are no

services for a long time.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that

a dynamic channel is requested immediately after being

This parameter specifies the policy for dynamic channel conversion in a concentric cell.

This parameter is configured according to the congestion

counter of the underlaid (UL) and overlaid (OL) voice

services.

If the UL voice service is congested, the dynamic channel is

converted at the UL cell.

This parameter specifies the PDCH downlink multiplex threshold.

The downlink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs

established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and

the downlink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher.

If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established

on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the

This parameter specifies the PDCH uplink multiplex threshold.

The uplink PDCH can carry a maximum of (threshold/10) TBFs.

If this parameter is set to a lower value, the TBFs

established on the PDCH and the subscribers are fewer, and

the uplink bandwidth for each subscriber is higher

If this threshold is set to a higher value, the TBFs established

on the PDCH and the subscribers are more, and the uplink

This parameter specifies the downlink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel

conversion.

When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,

dynamic channels are used.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic

channels.


This parameter specifies the uplink multiplex threshold of dynamic channel conversion.

When the number of subscribers carried over the channel reaches the threshold/10,

dynamic channels are used.

If this threshold is high, it is difficult to seize dynamic

channels.


This parameter specifies the maximum ratio of PDCHs in a cell. The total number of

TCHs and PDCHs available in a cell is fixed. The PDCH ratio is equal to PDCHs / (TCH/Fs +

static PDCHs). This parameter determines the proportion of PDCHs to the total number

of TCHs + PDCHs.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, there are

excessive PDCHs and insufficient TCHs. This affects CS

services.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, there are

insufficient PDCHs and excessive TCHs. This affects PS

This parameter specifies the multi-frequency reporting value.

Value range: Reporting the frequencies of six strongest cells; Reporting the frequency of

one strongest cell; Reporting the frequencies of two strongest cells; Reporting the

frequencies of three strongest cells

None

This parameter specifies the threshold of HCS signal strength.

The MS uses the signal strength in the MR and this threshold to calculate C31, which is

used for cell reselection.

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is high, it is difficult

for the cell to be selected.

If the threshold of HCS signal strength is low, it is easy for

the cell to be selected.

This parameter specifies the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) priority of a GPRS cell.

Value 0 indicates the lowest priority and value 7 indicates the highest priority.

If the priority is high, it is easy for the MS to select this cell

during cell reselection.

If the priority is low, it is difficult for the MS to select this

cell during cell reselection.

This parameter specifies the maximum TX power level for an MS to access the packet

control channel.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the power

consumption and radiation of the MS are high.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS may not

be able to access the channel.

This parameter specifies the minimum receive level for an MS in the cell to access the

system.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the coverage

area of the cell is large. The MS on the edge of the cell may

not be able to access the system.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the coverage area

of the cell is small. The usage of cell resources decreases.

This parameter specifies whether the SoLSA exclusive access cell is used. Only the MSs

customizing the Localised Service Area (LSA) service can access the exclusive cell.None

This parameter specifies whether the cell can be accessed during cell reselection.

Permit Cell Access: Access is permitted.

Prohibit Cell Access: Access is prohibited.

None

This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in different routing areas.

When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the

target cell belong to different routing areas, the MS starts cell reselection only when the

signal level of the neighbor cells in different routing areas is higher than that of this cell,

and when the signal level difference is greater than the value of this parameter.

In different routing areas, if this parameter is set to an

excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this

parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong

reselection occurs.

This parameter specifies the period when cell reselection is prohibited.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the period

when cell reselection is prohibited increases.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the period when

cell reselection is prohibited decreases.

This parameter specifies whether the MS can access another cell.

Yes: The MS can access another cell.

No: The MS cannot access another cell.

None

This parameter specifies whether GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation

during cell reselection. Value range: 0, 1

0: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is not used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.

1: GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSET is used for C32 calculation during cell reselection.

None

This parameter specifies whether GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis is applied to the C31

standards.

c31standard: applied

c31notuse: not applied

None

This parameter specifies the hysteresis of cell reselection in the same routing area.

When an MS in the ready state performs cell reselection, if the originating cell and the

target cell belong to the same routing area, the C2 value measured in the overlapped

area of two adjacent cells fluctuates greatly because of the fading feature of radio

channels. Therefore, the MS frequently performs cell reselection. The frequent cell

In the same routing area, if this parameter is set to an

excessive value, it is hard for cell reselection. If this

parameter is set to a modest value, the frequent ping-pong

reselection occurs.

This parameter specifies whether the PSI status message is supported.

Yes: supported

No: not supported

None

This parameter specifies whether the MS is allowed to send a measurement report to

the network.None

This parameter specifies the repetition period of the PS information PSI1.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the PSI1 cannot be received in real time.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the PSI1 is sent frequently. This occupies

many resources.

None


A priority is set before an MS accesses the cell. If the priority is higher than the

persistence level, the MS can access the cell. Otherwise, the MS cannot access the cell.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, it is difficult for

an MS to access the cell. Therefore, radio resources may be

wasted.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is easy for an

MS to access the cell. However, too many MSs may access






wasted.








wasted.








wasted.



This parameter specifies the number of timeslots for extension transmission in random

access. This parameter affects the interval for the MS to send a new Channel Request

after the channel request fails.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS sends a

new Channel Request within a long interval after the

channel request fails, thus reducing access collisions but

slowing down the MS access speed.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the MS sends a

This parameter specifies the minimum number of timeslots between two successive

channel requests.

The MS sends an access request and waits for a response. If no response is received

after the minimum number of timeslots, the MS resends the access request.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS needs

to wait for a long time before sending the next request. This

may affect MS services.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, it is possible that

a response is sent, but the MS has not received it because

This parameter specifies the maximum number of retransmissions for radio priority

4.The 2bit Radio Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request

message has four levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the

lowest priority.

None




lowest priority.

None




lowest priority.

None




lowest priority.

None

This parameter specifies the access control class. None

This parameter specifies the number of PRACH blocks. The value of this parameter

ranges from 1 to 12.

Value 1 indicates one PRACH.

Value 2 indicates two PRACHs.

...

None

This parameter specifies the number of PAGCH blocks. The value of this parameter

ranges from 1 to 12.

Value 1 indicates one PAGCH.

Value 2 indicates two PAGCHs.

...

None

This parameter specifies the number of PBCCH blocks. The value of this parameter

ranges from 1 to 4.

Value 1 indicates one PBCCH.

Value 2 indicates two PBCCHs.

Value 3 indicates three PBCCHs.

None

This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet

transfer mode.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some

information may be missing.




This parameter specifies the period of cell reselection measurement report in packet

idle mode.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, some

information may be missing.




This parameter specifies the minimum duration when the MS stays in non-DRX mode

after the NC NC-measurement report is sent.

The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time after the measurement report

is sent.

The MS should stay in non-DRX mode for a period of time

after the measurement report is sent.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the MS may

stay in non-DRX mode for a long time and services may be

affected.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. A higher value

indicates a higher access priority.

The principles of cell reselection offset are as follows:

1. For the cell with low traffic and low equipment usage,

Huawei recommends that MSs work in the cell. The value

range 0-20 dB is recommended.

2 For the cell with medium traffic, value 0 is recommended.

This parameter specifies the counter used for the MS to calculate C32. The timer is sent

through the system message broadcast in each cell.

If you do not want a fast-moving MS to access a micro cell,

this parameter should be set to a high value when the

coverage area of the micro cell is large.

When the BCCH frequency of a cell is listed in the neighbor cells for the MS, the negative

offset of C2 is calculated before timer T expires.

This parameter is set to avoid the ping-pong cell reselection by the fast-moving MS.

Therefore, the MS does not select this cell when the duration of signal strength on the

BCCH is shorter than the penalty time.

None

This parameter specifies the interval between two extension measurement reports.

If this parameter is set to a modest value, the extension

measurement report is sent frequently.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, measurement

information is not obtained timely.

This parameter specifies the type of the extension measurement report

Three types of the extension measurement report are type 1, type 2, and type 3.

Type 1: The MS sends the measurement report of the six strongest carriers to the

network regardless of whether the BSIC was decoded. The measurement report should

contain the received signal level and BSIC.

None

This parameter specifies the frequency index of the interference measurement in type 3

of the extension measurement report.None

This parameter specifies the NCC bitmap of the measurement report sent by the MS.

The MS reports only the NCC bitmap of the BSIC and the carrier measurement report

that matches the bitmap.

None

The network can require the MS to send measurement reports. When the MS is in idle

mode, it sends the extension measurement reports. This parameter can be set to em0

or em1.

None

This parameter specifies whether the CS paging on the A interface is supported.

Yes: The MS can receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS service.

No: The MS cannot receive CS paging on the A interface when handling the GPRS

service.

None

This parameter specifies whether the 11-bit EGPRS access is supported.

Yes: supported

No: not supported


EGPRS MS is shortened.

This parameter specifies the routing area color code of a GPRS cell. None

This parameter specifies the priority of packet access of MSs to a cell. The 2bit Radio

Priority message carried by the MS in the Packet Channel Request message has four

levels of priorities. Level 1 is the highest priority, and level 4 is the lowest priority. When

an MS accesses the network, the BSC compares the Radio Priority in the Channel

Request message with the parameter setting in the cell. The BSC requests for

None

This parameter specifies whether the SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the

CCCH of the cell.

SPLIT_PG_CYCLE is used to set the DRX period. For the BTS and MS supporting the

SPLIT_PG_CYCLE-based paging groups on the CCCH, this parameter is optional.

Yes: The SPLIT_PG_CYCLE parameter is transmitted on the CCCH of the cell.

None

In the cell reselection required by the network, the network requests the MS to send

measurement reports to control its cell reselection. There are three network control

modes.

nc0: Normal MS control. The MS performs automatic cell reselection.

nc1: MS control with measurement reports. The MS sends measurement reports to the

None

This parameter specifies the value of PAN_MAX. It is also the maximum value of N3102.

Value 4 indicates that PAN_MAX is 4; value 32 indicates that PAN_MAX is 32; value No

use indicates that this parameter is not used.

When the radio operating environment is good, decreasing

the parameter value improves the transmission rate.

When the radio operating environment is poor, increasing

the parameter value reduces the times of abnormally

releasing TBFs.This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When the MS receives a Packet

Downlink Ack/Nack message from the network for increasing the value of V(S) or V(A),

the MS increases N3102 by PAN_INC.

Value 0 indicates that PAN_INC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_INC is 7; value No use


PAN_INC should be greater than PAN_DEC. Usually,

PAN_INC = 2 x PAN_DEC.

However, N3102 cannot exceed PAN_MAX.

This parameter is used to set the value of N3102. When T3182 expires, the MS

decreases N3102 by PAN_DEC.

Value 0 indicates that PAN_DEC is 0; value 7 indicates that PAN_DEC is 7; value No use


None

This parameter specifies the maximum countdown value of the MS.

This parameter determines BS_CV_MAX and is used for the MS to calculate the CV. The

parameter also determines the duration of the T3198 timer.

Every time the MS sends an uplink RLC data block, the receive state of the data block is

set to Pending and the T3198 is started. If the MS receives a Packet Uplink Ack/Nack

If the value of this parameter is set to a modest value, the

MS may retransmits the RLC data block before the BSC

sends an Uplink Acknowledgment message. Thus, many

radio resources are not used but occupied.

If this parameter is set to an excessive value, the speed of This parameter specifies the acknowledgment message type used by the MS.

If four access pulses are used, the timing advance can be obtained without a polling

message.

If the RLC/MAC control block is used, the timing advance can be obtained only by

sending a polling message. Four access pulses are recommended.

None

This parameter specifies the access burst type used by the MS on the PRACH and

PTCCH/U. The access burst type is carried in the packet control acknowledgment

message.



Some MSs do not support the 11-bit access burst.

Therefore, 8bit is recommended.

This parameter specifies the maximum duration of the non-DRX mode. DRX

(discontinuous reception) is a parameter carried by the cell broadcast message.

The MS stays in the DRX mode for a certain period when changing from the packet

transfer mode to the packet idle mode. After the TBF is released, the MS monitors all

the CCCH blocks during the non-DRX mode period and the BSC6000 reserves the MS

It takes a shorter time to send the Immediate Assignment

message on all PCHs and AGCHs in non-DRX mode than in

DRX mode. During the period of non-DRX mode, the TBF

establishment time decreases, but the power consumption

of the MS increases.This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the TBF release after

receiving the last data block.

When the MS receives the last RLC data block carrying the last block flag (FBI=1) and

confirms that all the RLC data blocks on the TBF are received, the MS sends the Packet

Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying the final acknowledgement flag (FAI=1) and starts

If this parameter is set to a higher value, the TBF resources

(including TFI and timeslots) are reserved for a long time. If

no downlink data needs to be sent, many resources are not

used but occupied for a long time.

If the timer is set to a smaller value, the MS releases the This parameter specifies the timer set for the MS to wait for the Packet Uplink

Assignment message.

This parameter specifies the maximum interval set for the MS to wait for the Packet

Uplink Assignment message. After the MS sends the Packet Resource Request or Packet

Downlink Ack/Nack message carrying Channel Request Description, T3168 is started to

If the timer is set to a lower value, the MS can detect the

TBF establishment failure within a shorter period. If the TBF

establishment fails, the average delay of packet access is

short, but the success rate of TBF establishment in bad

radio environment decreases. In addition, the small timer Based on the paging channel used by the system, the network operation modes are

classified into Network Operation Mode I, Network Operation Mode II, and Network

Operation Mode III.

When the GS interface is configured, Network Operation Mode I is used.

When the Gs interface or the PCCCH is not configured, Network Operation Mode II is

Currently, the GPRS network is not configured with the Gs

interface or the PCCCH. Therefore, Network Operation

Mode II is selected by default.

Documents

150522640 2G Huawei NSN Parameter Mapping